Mercedes Benz 2003 C Class Coupe Users Manual

2015-02-05

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2003-C-Class-Coupe-Users-Manual-398315 mercedes-benz-2003-c-class-coupe-users-manual-398315 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 356 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

C 230 Kompressor
C 320
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demon-
stration of your trust in our company
name. Further, it exemplifies your desire to
own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passen-
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
ment of time:
앫Please read this manual carefully be-
fore putting it aside. Then return it to
your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
앫Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are de-
signed to acquaint you with the opera-
tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
cupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction ......................................... 9
Product information ............................... 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership .... 12
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada ......................... 13
Where to find it .................................... 14
Symbols ............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle .................. 17
Reporting safety defects ...................... 18
Reporting Safety Defects ............... 18
At a glance .......................................... 19
Cockpit .................................................20
Instrument cluster ................................22
Multifunction steering wheel ................24
Center console .....................................25
Overhead control panel ........................26
Door control panel ................................27
Getting started ...................................29
Unlocking .............................................30
Unlocking with the SmartKey ..........30
Adjusting ..............................................32
Seats ...............................................32
Steering wheel ................................37
Mirrors ............................................39
Driving ..................................................41
Fastening the seat belt ...................41
Starting the engine .........................44
Switching on headlamps .................47
Turn signals and high beam ............47
Windshield wipers ...........................48
Problems while driving ....................50
Parking and locking ..............................51
Parking brake ..................................51
Switching off headlamps .................52
Turning off engine ...........................52
Safety and Security ...........................55
Occupant safety ...................................56
Airbags ...........................................57
Seat belts .......................................62
Children in the vehicle ....................65
Panic alarm* ........................................72
Activating ........................................72
Deactivating ....................................72
Driving safety systems .........................73
ABS .................................................73
BAS .................................................74
ESP .................................................75
Anti-theft systems ................................78
Immobilizer .....................................78
Anti-theft alarm system* ................78
Tow-away alarm* ............................79
Contents
Controls in detail ............................... 81
Locking and unlocking ......................... 82
SmartKey ........................................ 82
Opening the doors from the inside . 85
Opening the trunk lid ...................... 85
Closing the trunk lid ....................... 86
Trunk lid emergency release .......... 86
Automatic central locking .............. 87
Locking and unlocking from
the inside ....................................... 87
Seats .................................................... 89
Easy-entry/exit feature* ................ 89
Head restraints............................... 90
Heated seats* ................................ 91
Memory function* ................................ 93
Storing positions into memory ....... 94
Recalling positions from memory ... 94
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ............................. 95
Lighting ................................................ 96
Exterior lamp switch ....................... 96
Combination switch ........................ 99
Hazard warning flasher ................... 99
Interior lighting ............................. 100
Instrument cluster ............................. 102
Instrument cluster illumination .... 102
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 102
Trip odometer .............................. 103
Tachometer .................................. 103
Outside temperature indicator ..... 104
Control system .................................. 105
Multifunction display .................... 105
Multifunction steering wheel ........ 106
Menus .......................................... 108
Standard display menu ................ 110
AUDIO menu ................................ 110
NAV menu .................................... 112
Malfunction memory menu .......... 112
Settings menu .............................. 114
Trip computer menu ..................... 125
TEL menu* ................................... 126
Manual transmission ......................... 130
Shifting into reverse ..................... 131
Automatic transmission* ................... 132
One-touch gearshifting ................. 133
Gear ranges .................................. 134
Gear selector lever position ......... 135
Program mode selector switch ..... 136
Accelerator position ..................... 137
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 137
Good visibility .................................... 138
Rear view mirror ........................... 138
Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 140
Sun visors .................................... 141
Climate control .................................. 142
Setting the temperature ............... 145
Adjusting air distribution and
volume ......................................... 145
Defrosting .................................... 146
Air recirculation mode .................. 146
Rear window defroster ................. 147
Air conditioning ............................ 148
Ventilated storage compartment . 148
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents ...................... 149
Deactivating the climate control
system ......................................... 149
Automatic climate control*
(Canada only) .................................... 150
Setting the temperature ............... 152
Adjusting air distribution .............. 153
Adjusting air volume .................... 153
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ....... 154
Defrosting .................................... 154
Contents
Air recirculation mode .................. 154
Charcoal filter .............................. 156
Rear window defroster ................. 156
Air conditioning ............................ 157
Residual heat and ventilation* ..... 158
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents ...................... 158
Audio system ..................................... 159
Audio and telephone, operation ... 159
Operating safety ........................... 159
Operating and display elements ... 160
Button and soft key operation ...... 162
Operation ..................................... 162
Radio mode .................................. 165
Cassette mode ............................. 168
CD changer* operating mode ...... 172
Telephone* operation .................. 176
Power windows .................................. 182
Opening and closing the windows 182
Synchronizing power windows ..... 184
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* ......... 185
Opening and closing the
sunshades for the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 185
Opening and closing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 186
Synchronizing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof ..................... 188
Driving systems ................................. 189
Cruise control .............................. 189
Loading .............................................. 192
Roof rack* ................................... 192
Luggage cover ............................. 192
Split folding rear bench seat ......... 192
Loading instructions .................... 194
Useful features .................................. 195
Interior storage spaces ................ 195
Ashtrays ....................................... 198
Cigarette lighter ........................... 199
Telephone* ................................... 200
Tele Aid* ...................................... 201
Garage door opener...................... 209
Operation ......................................... 213
The first 1000 miles (1500km) .......... 214
Driving instructions ........................... 215
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 215
Drinking and driving ..................... 215
Pedals .......................................... 215
Power assistance.......................... 216
Brakes........................................... 216
Driving off .....................................217
Parking .........................................217
Tires ..............................................218
Hydroplaning ................................ 219
Tire traction ..................................219
Tire speed rating ...........................219
Winter driving instructions ............220
Standing water .............................221
Passenger compartment ...............221
Driving abroad ..............................221
Control and operation of radio
transmitter ....................................222
Catalytic converter .......................222
Emission control ...........................223
Coolant temperature ....................223
At the gas station ...............................224
Check regularly and before a
long trip ........................................225
Engine compartment .......................... 226
Hood .............................................226
Engine oil ......................................227
Transmission fluid level ................229
Coolant level .................................229
Battery ..........................................231
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system ...........232
Contents
Tires and wheels ................................ 233
Important guidelines .................... 233
Life of tire ..................................... 234
Direction of rotation ..................... 234
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 234
Rotating wheels ............................ 235
Winter driving..................................... 236
Winter tires ................................... 236
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 237
Snow chains ................................. 237
Maintenance ...................................... 238
Clearing the service indicator....... 238
Service term exceeded ................. 238
Calling up the service indicator .... 239
Resetting the service indicator..... 239
Vehicle care ....................................... 240
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 240
Practical hints.................................. 245
What to do if … .................................. 246
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 246
Lamp in center console ................ 251
Messages in the display ............... 252
Where will I find ... ............................. 271
First aid kit ................................... 271
Spare wheel ................................. 271
Vehicle tool kit ............................. 272
Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 274
Unlocking the vehicle ................... 274
Locking the vehicle ...................... 275
Changing batteries ....................... 276
Fuel filler flap ............................... 277
Manually unlocking the
transmission selector lever .......... 277
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 278
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof ..... 278
Replacing bulbs ................................. 280
Bulbs ............................................ 280
Replacing bulbs for front lamps ... 282
Side marker lamp bulb ................. 285
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 285
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 287
Removing ..................................... 287
Installing ...................................... 287
Flat tire .............................................. 288
Preparing the vehicle ................... 288
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 288
Battery ............................................... 294
Disconnecting the battery ............ 295
Removing the batteries ................ 295
Charging and reinstalling
batteries ...................................... 295
Reconnecting the batteries .......... 295
Jump starting ..................................... 297
Towing the vehicle ............................. 299
Installing towing eye bolt ............. 302
Fuses ................................................. 303
Fuse box in passenger
compartment ............................... 303
Fuse box in engine compartment . 303
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk ............ 304
Contents
Technical data ................................. 305
Spare parts service ............................ 306
Warranty coverage ............................. 307
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet ..................... 307
Identification labels ........................... 308
Certification label ......................... 308
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ............................................. 308
Identification labels and numbers 308
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 309
C 230 Kompressor ....................... 309
C 320 ........................................... 309
Engine ................................................ 310
Rims and Tires ................................... 311
Same size tires ............................. 311
Mixed size tires ............................ 312
Spare wheel ................................. 313
Electrical system ................................ 314
Main Dimensions................................ 315
Weights .............................................. 316
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......... 317
Capacities..................................... 317
Engine oils .................................... 319
Engine oil additives ....................... 319
Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 319
Brake fluid .................................... 319
Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 320
Fuel requirements ........................ 320
Gasoline additives ........................ 321
Coolants ...................................... 321
Windshield and headlamp
washer system ............................. 324
Consumer information ....................... 325
Uniform tire quality grading ......... 325
Technical terms ...............................327
Index .................................................333
Contents
9
Product information
Introduction
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz orig-
inal parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for
your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and their special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in indi-
vidual cases an official approval or authori-
zation by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and acces-
sories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories ap-
proved by us are available at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, also
on permissible technical modifications,
and where proper installation will be per-
formed.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam-
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail-
ure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper proce-
dures.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-
mation, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instruc-
tions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Book-
let are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
앫New Car Limited Warranty,
앫Emission System Warranty,
앫Emission Performance Warranty,
앫California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),
앫State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or mal-
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
(1) the same substantial defect or mal-
function results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-
fect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have direct-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different sub-
stantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
The Service Booklet describes all the nec-
essary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
The service advisor will record each ser-
vice in the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram brochure in your glove box.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes, or Customer Ser-
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
eign countries, please be aware that:
앫Service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
alytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫gasoline may have a considerably low-
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
14
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. For you to
find information quickly each section has
its own reference color:
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
Controls in detail
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehi-
cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehi-
cle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Technical data
All important technical data for your vehi-
cle can be found in this section.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫this Operator’s Manual
앫the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
* Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehi-
cle.
왘This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
-> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
cross-reference term defini-
tions.
Display
Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
Warning! G
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
ards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
16
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫the safety precautions in this manual
앫the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫traffic rules and regulations
앫motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
dards
Warning! G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are in-
terconnected, any modification made may
produce an undesired effect on other sys-
tems.
Electronic system malfunctions could seri-
ously impair the operating safety of your ve-
hicle.
Ensure that any repairs or modifications to
electronic components are carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore nev-
er turn off the engine while driving.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
21
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page
1Headlamp washer switch* 140
2Combination switch 47
앫Turn signals 47
앫Windshield wipers 48
앫High beam 99
3Cruise control lever 189
4Instrument cluster 22,
102
5Multifunction steering
wheel
24,
106
6Horn
7Lever for voice control
system*, see separate op-
erating instructions
8Overhead control panel 26
9Glove box lid release 195
Item Page
10 Glove box lid 195
11 Center console 25
12 Starter switch 31
13 Steering wheel adjustment
handle, manual
38
14 Hood lock release 226
15 Parking brake pedal 46
16 Power window switches 182
17 Steering wheel adjustment
stalk, electrical*
38
18 Parking brake release 46
19 Door control panel 27
20 Exterior lamp switch 47, 96
21 Exterior mirror adjustment 39
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
23
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page
1Reset knob for:
앫Resetting trip odome-
ter
103
앫Instrument cluster illu-
mination
102
앫Resetting individual
settings
114
2Tachometer with:
?Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
250
-Antilock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) malfunc-
tion indicator lamp
247
;Brake warning
lamp, except Cana-
da
249
3Brake warning
lamp, Canada only
249
Item Page
3Speedometer with:
LLeft turn signal indi-
cator lamp
KRight turn signal in-
dicator lamp
vElectronic Stability
Program (ESP)
warning lamp
246
AHigh beam head-
lamp indicator
99
EIndicator lamp with-
out function1
1The indicator lamp illuminates briefly when you
turn the key in the starter switch to position 2
DTR Indicator lamp with-
out function1
Item Page
4Multifunction display
with:
Trip odometer 103
Main odometer
Outside temperature dis-
play
104
Digital clock 116
5Display for program
mode and selector lever
position
135
136
6Fuel gauge with:
Fuel reserve warning lamp 250
<Seat belt nonusage
warning lamp
250
1Supplemental re-
straint system indi-
cator lamp
248
24
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page
1Multifunction display in
speedometer
105
Operating control sys-
tem
106
2Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume
çdown/to decrease
æup/to increase
3Telephone*: Press button
íto take a call
ìto end a call
Item Page
4Menu systems: Press but-
ton
èfor next system
ÿfor previous system
5Moving within a menu:
Press button
jfor next display
kfor previous display
25
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Item Page
1Seat heater*, driver‘s side 91
2ESP control switch 75
3Hazard warning flasher
switch – switching on/off
99
4Central locking switch 87
5Anti-theft alarm system in-
dicator lamp
78
Tow-away alarm switch 79
6Seat heater*, passenger
side
91
7Indicator lamp 767
8Audio system, or 159
COMAND* (see separate
operating instructions)
Item Page
9Climate control 142
10 Ashtray 198
11 Storage compartment 196
12 Armrest 197
13 Program mode selector for
automatic transmission
136
14 Gearshift lever for manual
transmission
Selector lever for automat-
ic transmission
44
45
26
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item Page
1Rear interior lighting
on/off
100
2Panorama sliding/pop-up
roof*
186
3Right reading lamp on/off 101
4Interior lighting control 100
5Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid* (emergency call
system), telephone* and
voice control system* (see
separate operating instruc-
tions)
200
6Rear view mirror 39,
138
7Garage door opener 209
8Left reading lamp on/off 101
9Tele Aid* (emergency call
system) button
204
27
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item Page
1Door handle 85
2Memory function (for stor-
ing seat, mirror and steer-
ing wheel settings)
93
3Seat adjustment 32
4Switches for opening/clos-
ing front door windows
182
28
29
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
30
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the infor-
mation given here.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will help you with further in-
formation. The corresponding page refer-
ences are at the end of each segment.
Unlocking
Unlocking with the SmartKey
SmartKey with remote control
1‹Lock button
2ŒUnlock button
3ÂPanic button* (컄page 72)
왘Press unlock button 2 Œ on the key.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
왘Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
the starter switch.
i
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button* 3.
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Starter switch
0For removing key
The steering is locked when the key is
removed from the starter switch. If
necessary, move steering wheel slight-
ly to allow the locking mechanism to
engage.
1Power supply to some electrical con-
sumers, such as seat adjustment
2Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3Starting position
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend-
ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un-
locked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
!
If the key is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of
time, it can no longer be turned in the
starter switch.
앫Remove the key from the starter
switch and reinsert.
If the key can still not be turned, the
battery may not be sufficiently
charged.
앫Check the battery and charge it if
necessary (컄page 294).
앫Get a jump start (컄page 297).
To prevent accelerated battery dis-
charge and a possible dead battery, al-
ways remove the key from the starter
switch.
32
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Seats
The seats can be adjusted either manually
or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s
equipment.
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas-
tening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively re-
clined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and
seat belts provide the best restraint when
the wearer is in an upright position and belts
are properly positioned on the body. Your
seat must be adjusted so that you can cor-
rectly fasten your seat belt (컄page 41).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being ad-
justed.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock your ve-
hicle.
The power seats* can also be operated with
the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger side front
airbag when it is properly installed. Other-
wise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions.
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Manual seat
1Seat fore and aft adjustment
2Seat cushion tilt
3Seat height
4Backrest tilt
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘Lift handle 1.
왘Slide seat to the desired position.
왘Allow handle 1 to reengage. Check for
proper engagement before driving.
왘Check for proper engagement before
driving.
Adjust to a comfortable seating position
that still allows you to reach the accelera-
tor/brake pedal safely. The position
should be as far rearward as possible, con-
sistent with ability to properly operate con-
trols.
Seat cushion tilt
왘Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward
until your upper legs are lightly sup-
ported.
Seat height
왘Pull handle 3 up to raise seat cushion.
Push handle 3 down to lower seat
cushion
Backrest tilt
왘Turn handwheel 4 forward or back-
ward.
Head restraint height
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
i
When moving the seats, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or be-
hind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
34
Getting started
Adjusting
1Release knob
왘Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward. To lower
the head restraint, push release knob 1
and press down on the head restraint.
Head restraint tilt
왘Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint. Push or pull on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 89)
Power seat*
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
or
왘Open the driver’s or front passenger
door.
The seat adjustment switches are located
in each front door.
1Head restraint height
2Seat height
3Seat cushion tilt
4Seat fore and aft adjustment
5Backrest tilt
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 4.
Adjust to a comfortable seating posi-
tion that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as
possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or be-
hind the seat. Otherwise you could
damage the seat.
With the memory function*
(컄page 93) you can store seat posi-
tions together with settings for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat height
왘Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 2.
Seat cushion tilt
왘Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Backrest tilt
왘Press the switch forward or back in
direction of arrow 5 until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steer-
ing wheel.
Head restraint height
왘Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 1.
Head restraint tilt
왘Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint. Push or pull on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 89).
Folding the front seat backrest forward
1Release lever
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
i
In addition to the front seat backrests,
the front seat cushions can also be
shifted forward to permit easy access
to the rear whenever the seat is located
in the rear half of its adjustment range.
Swivel backrest forward by pulling the
release lever until the seat moves in a
combined forward and upward move-
ment.
36
Getting started
Adjusting
Folding backrest forward
왘Pull release lever 1 forward and tilt the
seat backrest forward.
왘Vehicles with manual seat adjustment:
If necessary, press the head restraint
downward while tilting the backrest
forward.
Folding backrest back
왘Fold and press the backrest rearward
until it engages in driving position.
왘Vehicles with manual seat adjustment:
If necessary, pull the head restraint out
while tilting the seat back.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 89).
Rear seat head restraints
1Lock button
i
Vehicles with power seat*: The head
restraints will automatically move
down.
i
Vehicles with power seat*: The head
restraint returns to its previous posi-
tions.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Folding head restraints back
왘Push lock button 1.
The head restraints will fold backward.
Placing head restraint upright
왘Pull the head restraint forward until it
locks into position.
Two different head restraint angle posi-
tions are available.
Head restraint height
1Release knob
Raising:
왘Pull up on head restraint.
If the head restraint is fully retracted,
press release knob 1 and pull the head
restraint out.
Lowering:
왘Push button 1.
왘Push down on head restraint.
Steering wheel
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
ing, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock your ve-
hicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature* can also be operated with the driv-
er’s door open. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
38
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment, manual
1Release handle
왘To unlock the steering column, pull
handle 1 out until its stop limit.
왘Adjust the steering wheel to the de-
sired position.
왘To lock, press handle 1 all the way in
until it engages.
The steering wheel is once again
locked into position.
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
or
왘Open the driver’s door.
The switch is located on the steering col-
umn (lower left).
1Steering column, lengthen or shorten
2Steering column, height
!
Do not drive the vehicle until you have
properly locked the steering column.
If the warning message
STEERING
WHEEL ADJUST - LOCK!
is displayed
while the engine is running, the steer-
ing column is not locked (컄page 268).
39
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering column, lengthen or shorten
왘Move stalk forward or backward in the
direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Steering column, height
왘Move stalk up or down in the direction
of arrow 2. Make sure that your legs
can move freely and that all the dis-
plays (including malfunction and indi-
cator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible.
Mirrors
Adjust the inside and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic condi-
tions.
Inside rear view mirror
왘Manually adjust the inside rear view
mirror.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 138).
i
With the memory function*
(컄page 93) you can store settings for
the steering wheel together with set-
tings for the exterior rear view mirrors
and seat positions.
Warning! G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
40
Getting started
Adjusting
Exterior rear view mirrors The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.
1Adjustment button
2Passenger side mirror
3Driver’s side mirror
왘Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lights in the instrument cluster
light up.
왘Press button 3 for the left mirror or
button 2 for the right mirror.
왘Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
left or right according to the setting de-
sired.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 138).
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
side rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
i
With the memory function*
(컄page 93) you can store settings for
the exterior rear view mirrors together
with seat positions and settings for the
steering wheel.
!
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward or backward,
reposition it by applying firm pressure
until it snaps into place. The mirror
housing is now properly positioned and
you can adjust the mirror normally.
41
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Fastening the seat belt
Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot-
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear-
ance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should al-
ways wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as ex-
pected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (컄page 56).
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger side front
airbag when it is properly installed. Other-
wise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions.
42
Getting started
Driving
The seat belt presenter for driver and pas-
senger makes it easier to put on the seat
belt.
1Seat belt presenter
왘Manually adjust the seat belt presenter
to the desired position
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best re-
straint when the wearer is in an upright po-
sition and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt - even
those in the rear.
Warning! G
Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄page 60).
i
The seat belt presenter must be put
back to its original position before lean-
ing the seat backrest toward the rear or
letting someone enter the rear passen-
ger compartment.
43
Getting started
Driving
1Latch plate
2Release button
3Buckle
왘With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from the belt outlet.
왘Place the belt over your shoulder.
왘Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until it
clicks.
왘If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Belt outlet height adjustment
1Button for belt outlet height adjust-
ment
왘To raise, slide belt outlet upward.
왘To lower, press button 1 and slide belt
outlet downward.
Proper use of seat belts
앫Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck or pass under the
arm). For this purpose, you can adjust
the height of the belt outlet.
앫Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
right position.
앫Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
son and another object at the same
time.
앫Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.
44
Getting started
Driving
앫Ensure that the seat belt is always fit-
ted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
Starting the engine Manual transmission
Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
왘Make sure that the gearshift lever is in
Neutral position.
왘Do not depress accelerator.
왘Fully depress clutch pedal.
Otherwise the engine cannot be start-
ed due to the integrated safety inter-
lock.
Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective-
ness of the belts.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly ven-
tilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes
are entering the vehicle while driving, have
the cause determined and corrected imme-
diately. If you must drive under these condi-
tions, drive only with at least one window
fully open.
45
Getting started
Driving
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 3. Release only when the en-
gine is firing regularly (컄page 31).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 130).
Automatic transmission*
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
PPark position with selector lever lock
RReverse gear
NNeutral
DDrive position
왘Make sure that the gear selector lever
is set to P.
왘Do not depress accelerator.
Starting
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄page 31).
왘Depress the brake pedal.
The selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine
with the key see “Turning off the engine”
(컄page 52)
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘Turn key in starter to position 0 and re-
peat starting procedure.
Remember that extended starting at-
tempts can drain the battery
왘Get a jump start (컄page 297).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a mal-
function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the key to position 3 and
release it again immediately. The en-
gine then starts automatically.
46
Getting started
Driving
Parking brake
1Release handle
2Parking brake
왘Release the parking brake by pulling on
handle 1.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Driving
왘Depress the brake pedal.
왘Move selector lever to position D or R
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).
왘Release the brake pedal.
왘Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
matic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs drop down.
After a cold start, the automatic transmis-
sion engages at a higher revolution. This al-
lows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could release the parking
brake, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
!
If you hear a warning signal when driv-
ing off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
duces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
47
Getting started
Driving
More information on driving can be found
in the “Operation” section (컄page 215).
Switching on headlamps
Exterior lamp switch
1Off
2Low beam headlamps on
왘Turn the switch to B.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 96).
Turn signals and high beam
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
Combination switch
1Turn signals, right
2Turn signals, left
왘Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
Warning! G
Vehicles with automatic transmission: It is
dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
or N if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control
of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
48
Getting started
Driving
High beam
왘Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam symbol A in the
instrument cluster lights up.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 99).
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
Combination switch
1Single wipe
2Switching on windshield wipers
왘Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
Switching on windshield wipers
왘Turn the combination switch to the de-
sired position depending on the inten-
sity of the rain.
0Windshield wipers off
IIntermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal blinks three times.
49
Getting started
Driving
Single wipe
왘Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘Push switch in the direction of arrow 1
past the resistance point.
The windshield wiper operates with
washer fluid.
i
Vehicles without rain sensor*: Fast
wiper speed III goes to setting II when
the vehicle is standing still.
Vehicles with rain sensor*: Intermittent
wiping interval dependent on wetness
of windshield. Wiping will not occur
with a door open.
!
Vehicles with rain sensor*: Do not
leave in intermittent setting when vehi-
cle is taken to an automatic car wash or
during windshield cleaning. Wipers will
operate in presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
The switch should not be left in inter-
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the en-
gine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield.
!
If leaves, snow, etc. block the wind-
shield wipers, switch off the wipers.
앫For safety reasons, withdraw key
from starter switch. Remove block-
age.
앫Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I,
앫set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed.
앫have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
50
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
앫An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫The engine electronics may not be op-
erating properly.
앫Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘Give very little gas.
왘Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
The coolant temperature is over 248°F
(120°C)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘Check the coolant level and add cool-
ant if necessary (컄page 229).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘Do not start the engine under any cir-
cumstances.
왘Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
termined:
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫major assemblies
앫fuel system
앫engine mount
왘Start the engine in the usual manner.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Parking brake
1Release handle
2Parking brake
왘Step firmly on parking brake 2.
When the engine is running, the indica-
tor lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
Warning! G
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re-
moving the key from the starter switch. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is
removed.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehi-
cle.
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫Move the selector lever to position P
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).
앫Slowly release brake pedal.
앫When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards road curb.
앫Turn the key to starter switch position 0
and remove.
앫Take the key and lock vehicle when leav-
ing.
52
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄page 47).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 96).
Turning off engine
왘Place the gear selector lever in
position P (manual transmission: first
or reverse gear).
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could release the parking
brake and/or move the gear selector lever
from position P, either of which could result
in an accident and/or serious injury.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dan-
gerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (manual transmission:
first or reverse gear).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb. i
Always set the parking brake in addi-
tion to shifting to position P (manual
transmission: first or reverse gear).
i
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the road curb.
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with the SmartKey
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 0 and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
왘Press the seat belt release button
(컄page 41).
왘After exiting the vehicle press the lock
button ‹ on the remote control
(컄page 30).
The locking knobs on the doors move
down.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 82).
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
!
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
54
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm*
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im-
portant facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫Seat belts
앫Emergency tensioning device
앫Airbags
앫Child seats
앫Child seat recognition
앫Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH)
As independent systems their protective
effects work in conjunction with each oth-
er.
The 1 warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up:
앫for about 4 seconds when you turn the
key in the starter switch to position 1.
앫for about 4 seconds when you start the
engine by turning the key.
The warning lamp goes out shortly after
you start the engine. This shows that the
restraint systems are operational.
A malfunction in the system has been de-
tected if the 1 warning lamp:
앫fails to extinguish after approximately
4seconds.
앫does not come on at all.
앫comes on after the engine was started
or while driving.
For safety reasons, we strongly recom-
mend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 248).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄page 65).
i
The warning lamp remains lit if the key
is turned to position 2 and left there.
The warning lamp will go out when you
start the engine.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Airbags
Warning! G
In the event that the SRS malfunction indica-
tor lamp lights up during driving or does not
come on at all, the SRS may not be opera-
tional. For your safety, we strongly recom-
mend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in inju-
ry.
Improper work on the restraint systems, in-
cluding incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unin-
tended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be per-
formed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning! G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) im-
pacts, or side (side impact and head protec-
tion window curtain airbags) impacts which
may cause significant injuries. However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releas-
es a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some tempo-
rary breathing difficulty for people with asth-
ma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
Warning! G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear your
seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc-
cupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously in-
jured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat back-
rest.
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breast-
bone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combina-
tion of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any prob-
lems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dash-
board.
앫Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
side the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
앫Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
앫Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side airbag inflates. This
could result in serious injuries or death
should the airbag be triggered. Always
sit upright, properly use the seat belts
and appropriate size infant or child re-
straint system.
앫Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
vate the passenger side front airbag
when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, seri-
ous or fatal injury will result.
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
sult in severe injuries to you or other occu-
pants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manu-
al.
Warning! G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger side front airbag.
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
side impact airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact airbags there is a
possibility for a side airbag related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not prop-
erly seated or restrained when next to a side
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door or rear
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
quarter trim panels where the side air-
bag inflates. This could result in serious
injuries or death should the side airbag
be activated.
(2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat
belts and use an appropriately sized in-
fant or child restraint system for all chil-
dren 12 years old or under.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear side
airbags deactivated, then deactivation can
be accomplished upon your written request
to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center at an additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,
or side (side impact and head protec-
tion window curtain airbags) impacts
which exceed preset thresholds.
Only during these types of impacts, if of
sufficient severity to meet the deploy-
ment thresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should al-
ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to pro-
vide their supplemental protection.
In cases of other frontal impacts,
angled impacts, roll-overs, other side
impacts, rear collisions, or other acci-
dents, the airbags will not be activated.
The driver and passengers will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
We caution you not to rely on the pres-
ence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to acti-
vate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the poten-
tial and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passen-
ger that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to ensure that the vehicle will continue
to provide supplement crash protec-
tion for occupants.
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning! G
앫Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts in-
stalled or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Airbags and ETDs are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. An airbag
or emergency tensioning device (ETD)
that was activated must be replaced
앫No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or re-
moving any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger airbag cov-
er, door trim panels, or door frame
trims, and installation of additional elec-
trical/electronic equipment on or near
SRS components and wiring. Keep area
between airbags and occupants free
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
앫Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projec-
tiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain airbag is deployed.
앫An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
앫Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unin-
tended activation of the SRS.
앫In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop-
erative or causing unintended airbag de-
ployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abra-
sions or other injuries resulting from air-
bag deployment.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an “SRS” by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Front airbags
Driver and passenger airbags are de-
ployed:
앫in the event of a frontal impact
앫if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫independently of the side impact air-
bags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
ed by the fastened seat belts.
The front passenger airbag will only be de-
ployed if:
앫the front passenger seat is occupied
앫the 7 indicator lamp in the center
console is not lit (컄page 67).
1Driver airbag
2Passenger airbag
Side impact airbags, window curtain
airbags
The side impact airbags and window cur-
tain airbags are deployed:
앫on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
앫independently of the front airbags
The side impact airbags are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the sys-
tem’s deployment threshold.
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system’s deployment threshold.
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The front passenger side airbag will only
deploy if the system senses that the front
passenger seat is occupied.
1Window curtain airbag
2Side impact airbags
Seat belts
The seat belt nonusage warning lamp <
in the instrument cluster lights up and a
warning sounds for a short time when you
turn the key in the starter switch to
position 2 and the driver‘s seat belt is not
fastened.
After starting the engine the seat belt non-
usage warning lamp blinks for a brief peri-
od to remind the driver and passengers to
fasten the seat belts.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in
most states and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fas-
tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Information on fastening seat belts is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄page 41).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄page 65).
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best re-
straint when the wearer is in an upright po-
sition and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt.
Warning! G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this sec-
tion, as that could result in serious inju-
ries in case of an accident.
앫Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag,
front passenger airbag, side impact air-
bags, head protection window curtain
airbags for side windows), ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device), and front
seat knee bolsters. The system is de-
signed to enhance the protection of-
fered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(side impact and window curtain air-
bags) impacts which exceed preset de-
ployment thresholds.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD)
The seat belts are equipped with emergen-
cy tensioning devices and belt force limit-
ers.
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-
lowing cases when the seat belts are fas-
tened:
앫in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
ing a preset severity level
앫if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1indicator lamp (컄page 56)
In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-
es remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on oc-
cupants during a crash.
앫Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
verely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
앫Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these
might cause injuries.
앫Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdo-
men. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another per-
son or other objects.
앫Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
sure on the abdomen.
앫Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
앫Ensure that the infant or child is prop-
erly secured by a belt at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and infor-
mation on choosing an appropriate re-
straint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Infant and child restraint systems
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver‘s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child re-
straint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During the seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
vated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual man-
ner.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Warning! G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When scrapping the emergency tensioning
device, our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These are available at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system’s deployment threshold.
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
Information on child seats with mount-
ing fittings for tether anchorages
(컄page 69).
For information on “LATCH”-type child
seat mounts (컄page 70).
Warning! G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the Dis-
trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories
and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint man-
ufacturer of compliance with this stan-
dard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruc-
tion manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
required for use with the BabySmartTM air-
bag deactivation system. With the special
child seat properly installed, the passenger
front airbag will not deploy.
The 7indicator lamp located in the
center console will be illuminated, except
with the key removed or in the starter
switch position 0.
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. un-
til they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, re-
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
cident.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle; even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
hicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i
The system does not deactivate the
side impact airbag and the emergency
tensioning device.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the key in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2, the 7 indicator lamp
located in the center console lights up for
approx. 6 seconds and then goes out.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not func-
tioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 251).
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Warning! G
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys-
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
tem. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
Warning! G
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
front passenger airbag will not deploy only if
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminat-
ed.
Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
Anchorage rings 1 are located on the back
side of the rear backrests and on the floor
behind rear seat.
Prior to installing a tether strap, note the
following steps:
왘Fold backrest forward.
왘Guide tether strap between head re-
straints and rear shelf.
Head restraint must be installed (if re-
movable) and positioned such that the
top tether strap can pass freely be-
tween the head restraint and top of
seat back.
Make sure that the tether strap is not
twisted.
왘Fold backrest back until it locks in
place.
Warning! G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such de-
vices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the 7 indicator lamp not to come on
during self-test or be continuously lit, indi-
cating that the system is not functioning.
Warning! G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-
sengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
use. Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘Fold up anchorage ring 1.
왘Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of
the tether strap, to anchorage ring 1.
Child seat anchors – “LATCH” type
This vehicle is equipped with two “LATCH”
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a “LATCH” child seat
with the matching anchor fittings.
If a child seat is not installed, the “LATCH”
anchors can be folded back between the
seat cushion and the backrest.
왘Grip inner side of anchors 1 and fold
forward until they lock in place.
왘Install child seat according to the man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
To fold mounts back
왘Press down button 2 on each anchor
and return anchor to its catch.
i
For safety, make sure that the hook has
attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
i
The child seat must be firmly attached
in the right and left side anchors.
i
Non-“LATCH” type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children from
41 lbs. until they reach a height where a
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
Before installing the child seat, make sure
anchors 1 are folded out and locked in
place.
Install child seat according to manufactur-
er’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 1.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to your child.
Damaged or impact-damaged child seats or
child seat anchors must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
72
Safety and Security
Panic alarm*
Panic alarm*
An audible alarm and blinking exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.
1Â button
Activating
왘Press and hold button 1 for at least one
second.
Deactivating
왘Press button 1 again.
왘Insert key in starter switch.
i
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button 1.
i
For operation in the USA only: This de-
vice complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
73
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find informations on
the following driving safety systems:
앫ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫BAS (Brake Assist System)
앫ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
ABS
The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
that the wheels do not lock during braking.
This allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady
pressure on the brake pedal while experi-
encing the pulsation.
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and ability to steer
the vehicle.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even with light brake pressure. The
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions and func-
tions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
i
In winter operation, the maximum ef-
fectiveness of the ABS, ESP is only
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires),
or snow chains as required.
Warning! G
The following factors increase the risk of ac-
cidents:
앫Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS, BAS, ESP cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
Warning! G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
ABS and significantly reduces braking effec-
tiveness.
i
To alert following vehicles to slippery
road conditions you discover, operate
your hazard warning flashers as appro-
priate.
74
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
ABS control
The - malfunction indicator lamp in the
speedometer lights up when you turn the
key in the starter switch to position 2. It
goes out when the engine is running.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 247).
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
tially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 254).
Warning! G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
er’s safety or the safety of others.
75
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slip-
pery road surfaces.
The ESP warning lamp v in the speed-
ometer dial flashes when the ESP is en-
gaged.
The warning lamp v in the speedome-
ter dial lights up when you turn the key in
the starter switch to position 2. It goes out
when the engine is running.
Warning! G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following an-
other vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Warning! G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ESP warning lamp v flashing in the
speedometer dial. In this case proceed as
follows:
앫While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫While driving, ease up on the accelera-
tor.
앫Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
76
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 246).
Switching off the ESP
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have drive wheels spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
such as:
앫starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
앫sand or gravel
Warning! G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
er’s safety or the safety of others.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
tion, the engine must be shut off (key in
starter switch position 0 or 1) when
앫the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer
앫the vehicle is being towed with the
front axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
rear axle brake system.
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size.
Warning! G
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circum-
stances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
dard driving maneuvers.
77
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
1ESP off
2ESP on
왘Press upper half 1 of the switch.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer dial comes on.
ESP is deactivated.
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
the ESP warning lamp v in the speed-
ometer dial flashes, regardless of the
speed.
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when ESP is deactivated.
ESP always operates when you are brak-
ing, even when it has been deactivated.
Switching on the ESP
왘Press lower half 2 of the switch.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer goes out. You are now
again in normal driving mode.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
When the ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
78
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
앫Removing the key from the starter
switch activates the immobilizer.
Deactivating
앫Inserting the key in the starter switch
deactivates the immobilizer.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
앫a door
앫the trunk lid
앫the hood.
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immedi-
ately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫the vehicle is opened with the mechan-
ical key.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the SmartKey. The turn
signal lamps blink three times to indicate
that the alarm system is activated. The in-
dicator lamp in the switch for the tow-away
alarm will blink after approximately 10 sec-
onds when the alarm system is completely
armed (컄page 80).
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). i
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
tem* provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
i
If the turn signal lamps do not blink
three times one of the following ele-
ments may not be properly closed:
앫a door
앫the trunk lid
앫the hood
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
79
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey. The
turn signal lamps blink once to indicate
that the alarm system is deactivated.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
왘Insert the key in the starter switch.
or
왘Press the Œ or ‹ button.
Tow-away alarm*
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
Arming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatical-
ly.
i
The alarm system will rearm automati-
cally after approximately 40 seconds if
a door or the trunk is not opened.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
ed on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
tem provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
80
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be-
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
1Tow-away alarm off switch
2Indicator lamp
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
왘Turn off the ignition and remove the
key.
왘Press upper half 1 of the switch.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up
briefly.
왘Lock your vehicle with the key.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
til you lock your vehicle again.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
if the ignition is turned on.
81
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission*
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Audio system
Power windows
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
82
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi-
cle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are giv-
en at the beginning of each segment.
Locking and unlocking
Information on locking and unlocking can
be found in the “Getting started” section
on (컄page 30) and (컄page 51).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys with remote controls and a re-
movable mechanical key. The locking tabs
for the mechanical key portion of the two
keys are a different color to help distin-
guish each key unit.
The remote control key provides an ex-
tended operating range. To prevent theft,
however, it is advisable to only unlock the
vehicle when you are in close proximity to
it.
The key centrally locks and unlocks:
앫the doors
앫the trunk lid
앫the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote controls
1‹ Lock button
2Mechanical key locking tab
3ΠUnlock button
4Battery check lamp
5Â Panic button* (컄page 72)
i
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button* 5.
83
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘Press button Œ.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
locking if neither door nor trunk lid is
opened, the SmartKey is not inserted in
the starter switch, or the central locking
switch is not activated.
Global locking
왘Press button ‹.
All turn signal lamps blink three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the key so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 4 blinks twice.
The key will then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘Press button Œ once.
Global unlocking
왘Press button Œ twice.
Global locking
왘Press button ‹.
Restoring to factory setting
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 4 blinks twice.
i
You can also open and close the power
windows (컄page 183) and panorama
sliding/pop-up roof (컄page 185) from
outside using the SmartKey.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the key to high levels of elec-
tromagnetic radiation.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. It is possible for children to open a
locked door from the inside, which could re-
sult in an accident and/or serious injury.
84
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries
왘Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 4 lights up briefly
to indicate that the key batteries are in
order.
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
왘Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the key, then either the
batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
charged or the key is malfunctioning or
the vehicle battery is drained.
앫Check the batteries in the key and
replace them if necessary
(컄page 276).
or
앫Check the vehicle battery
(컄page 294).
or
앫Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄page 274) as required.
Lock the vehicle using the mechan-
ical key (컄page 275).
If the key is malfunctioning, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
If battery check lamp 4 does not light
up briefly during check, then the key
batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄page 276).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
1Locking knob
2Inside door handle
왘Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
Opening the trunk lid
1Handle
왘Pull handle 1 in direction of arrow to
open the trunk lid.
The trunk lid swings open upwards. Always
make sure that there is sufficient overhead
clearance.
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the re-
mote control, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the alarm.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol-
lowing:
앫Press button Œ or‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
i
The vehicle must be unlocked.
86
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk lid
1Handle
왘Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
grip 1.
왘Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
on it.
Trunk lid emergency release
The emergency release button is located in
the trunk lid.
Illumination of the emergency release but-
ton:
앫The button will blink for 30 minutes af-
ter opening the trunk lid
앫The button will blink for 60 minutes af-
ter closing the trunk lid.
왘Briefly press the emergency release
button.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk lid. Be es-
pecially careful when small children are
around.
Warning! G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
or.
!
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle bat-
tery is discharged or disconnected.
i
If the emergency release button is
pressed and the vehicle was centrally
locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
opens.
To cancel the alarm, insert the key in
the starter switch or press button Œ
or‹ on the key.
87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk lid automatically
lock when the ignition is switched on and
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the control system (컄page 122).
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk lid from inside using the central lock-
ing switch. This can be useful, for example,
if you want to lock the vehicle before start-
ing to drive.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
locked with the central locking switch.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact ex-
ceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫is pushed
앫is on a test stand
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
88
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
The switch is located in the center console.
Central locking switch
1Locking
2Unlocking
Locking
왘Press upper half 1 of the central lock-
ing switch.
If both front doors are closed, the vehi-
cle locks.
Unlocking
왘Press lower half 2 of the central lock-
ing switch.
The vehicle unlocks.
i
You can open a locked door from in-
side. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
앫while in the selective remote con-
trol mode, only the door opened
from the inside is unlocked.
앫while in the global remote control
mode, the complete vehicle is un-
locked when a door is opened from
the inside.
89
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄page 32).
Easy-entry/exit feature*
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the
driver’s seat moves to the rear.
This allows easier entry into and exit from
the vehicle when the driver’s door is
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the start-
er switch and the driver’s door is closed,
the steering wheel and the driver’s seat re-
turn to their last set position.
You can activate the following functions:
앫Steering column:
Only the steering column is adjusted.
앫Steering column and seat:
The steering column and the seat are
adjusted.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be
switched on or off in the individual setting
menu of the control system (컄page 123).
Warning! G
You must make sure that no one can be-
come trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
the easy-entry/exit feature* is activated,
the driver’s door is being opened and the en-
gine is turned off or the SmartKey is re-
moved from the starter switch. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature*, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
90
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints
Information on head restraint adjustment
can be found in the “Getting started” sec-
tion (컄page 32).
Front seat head restraints, manual seat
Removing front head restraints
왘Pull head restraint to its highest posi-
tion.
왘Push button 1 and pull out head re-
straint.
Installing front head restraints
왘Insert head restraint and push it down
to the stop.
왘Push button 1 and adjust head re-
straint to desired position.
Front seat head restraints, power seat*
Removing front head restraints
왘Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
the head restraint is fully extended.
왘Pull out head restraint.
Installing front head restraints
왘Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
about five seconds.
왘Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
왘Adjust head restraint to desired posi-
tion.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
i
Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier
removal and installation of the head re-
straints.
91
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints
Removing rear head restraints
왘Pull head restraint to its highest posi-
tion.
왘Push button 1 and pull out head re-
straint.
Installing rear head restraints
왘Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.
왘Push button 1 and adjust head re-
straint to desired position.
Heated seats*
The switches are located in the center con-
sole.
1Normal heating
2Rapid heating
왘Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
92
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching on seat heating
왘Press upper switch position 1.
A red indicator lamp on the switch
lights up.
Switching on rapid seat heating
왘Press lower switch position 2.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
light up.
Switching off seat heating
왘If one indicator lamp is on, press upper
switch position 1.
왘If both indicator lamps are on, press
lower switch position 2.
!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are blinking, there is in-
sufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off auto-
matically.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as suffi-
cient voltage is available.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one indicator lamp re-
mains lit.
i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
93
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Memory function*
The memory button and stored position
switch are located on the door.
You can store up to three different settings
per key.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position:
앫Driver’s seat and backrest position
앫Steering wheel position
앫Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
position
앫Passenger side exterior rear view mir-
ror position
앫Front passenger seat position
These key-dependent memory settings
can be deactivated if desired
(컄page 124).
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv-
er should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to en-
sure adequate control, reach and com-
fort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. Also see air-
bag section (컄page 57) for proper seat
positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, opera-
tion and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be ad-
justed for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
Warning! G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
94
Controls in detail
Memory function*
1Memory button
2Stored position button
왘Make sure that the ignition is switched
on or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
Storing positions into memory
왘Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
rear view mirrors to the desired posi-
tion (컄page 32).
왘Turn button 2 to selected memory po-
sition.
왘Press memory button 1.
왘Release memory button and push
button 2 within three seconds.
All the settings are stored at the select-
ed position.
Recalling positions from memory
왘Turn button 2 to selected memory po-
sition.
왘Press and hold button 2 until the seat,
steering wheel and rear view mirrors
have fully moved to the stored posi-
tions.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored posi-
tions.
Warning! G
Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move backrest to an upright position.
95
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
ing position
For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
You can store a parking position for the
passenger exterior rear view mirror for
each key using the memory switch.
For information about activating the park-
ing position, see “Activating exterior rear
view mirror parking position”
(컄page 124).
1Adjustment button
2Passenger side exterior rear view mir-
ror
3Memory button
왘Stop the vehicle.
왘Switch ignition on (if not already on).
왘Press button 2.
The passenger side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
왘Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 1 so that you see the rear
wheel and the curb.
왘Press memory button “M” 3 on the
door.
왘Within three seconds press bottom of
adjustment button 1 above the exterior
lamp switch.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
96
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the head-
lamps and use the turn signals, see the
“Getting started” section (컄page 47).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel
MOff
UAutomatic headlamp mode
CParking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only: When engine is run-
ning, the low beam is also switched
on.
BLow beam plus parking lamps or
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
ˆStanding lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
i
If you remove the key and open the
driver’s door while the parking lamps or
low beam headlamps are switched on,
then
앫a warning sounds
앫$ appears in the multifunction
display
앫the message
TURN OFF LAMPS
ap-
pears in the multifunction display
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
97
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp
switch, see above.
Automatic headlamp mode
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
Warning! G
In automatic headlamp mode, the head-
lamps will not be automatically switched on
under foggy conditions. To minimize risk to
you and to others, activate headlamps by
turning exterior lamp switch to B.
The driver is responsible for the operation of
the vehicle’s lights at all times. The automat-
ic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driv-
er. Switch on the vehicle lights manually
when driving or when traffic conditions re-
quire you to do so.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated, the low beam headlamps will
not be switched off automatically.
i
Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can
not be switched on manually with exte-
rior lamp switch in position U. To
activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B.
i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is regis-
tered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
98
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
왘Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions the parking
lamps will also switch on.
Canada only
When you shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(with a three-minute delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam head-
lamps.
USA only
The high beam headlamps can also be ac-
tivated when driving with the daytime run-
ning lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.
To activate the daytime running lamp
mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode” (컄page 119).
Locator lighting and night security illu-
mination
Locator lighting and night security illumi-
nation are described in the control system
section under “Setting locator lighting”
(컄page 120) and “Exterior lamps delayed
shut off” (컄page 120).
Switching on front fog lamps
왘Make sure that the low beam head-
lamps are switched on.
왘Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch lights up.
Switching on rear fog lamp
왘Make sure that the low beam head-
lamps are switched on.
왘Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch lights up.
i
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
(컄page 96).
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding allow-
able lamp operation.
99
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
1High beam
2High beam flasher
Switching on high beams
왘Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B or to U (컄page 96).
왘Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The high beam symbol is illuminated on
the instrument cluster.
High beam flasher
왘Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be activat-
ed with the ignition switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed.
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
1Hazard warning flasher switch
Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
All turn signals will blink.
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
왘Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
100
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
1Rear interior lights
2Right front reading lamp
3Rocker switch: Automatic control off
4Rocker switch: Automatic control on
5Rocker switch: Front interior lights on
6Left front reading lamp
Activating automatic control
왘Press the rocker switch to the center
position 4.
Interior lamps are switched on in dark-
ness, when
앫unlocking the vehicle
앫opening a door
앫removing the SmartKey from start-
er switch
The interior lamps are switched off follow-
ing an adjustable time delay (컄page 121).
Deactivating automatic control
왘Press the rocker switch to the right
position 3
The interior lighting remains switched
off, even when
앫centrally unlocking the vehicle
앫opening a door
앫removing the SmartKey from the
starter switch
Manual control
Switching rear interior lights on and off
왘Press button 1.
The lights in the rear passenger com-
partment go on.
왘Press button 1 again.
The lights in the rear passenger com-
partment go out.
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after ap-
proximately five minutes, when the key
is removed or in the starter switch
position 0.
An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
101
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching right front reading lamp on
and off
왘Press button 2.
The right reading lamp goes on.
왘Press button 2 again.
The right reading lamp goes off.
Switching left front reading lamp on and
off
왘Press button 6.
The left reading lamp goes on.
왘Press button 6 again.
The left reading lamp goes off.
Switching all front interior lights on
왘Press rocker switch to position 5.
The front interior lamps go on.
Switching all front interior lights off
왘Press rocker switch to position 3 or 4.
The front interior lamps go out.
i
The setting selected for the interior
lighting is used for the trunk lighting as
well.
If you leave the trunk lid open for an ex-
tended period of time, the trunk light-
ing will switch off automatically after
approximately ten minutes
102
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄page 22).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you:
앫open a door
앫turn on the ignition
앫press the reset knob (컄page 22)
앫switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster set-
tings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄page 116).
Instrument cluster illumination
Use the reset knob (컄page 22) to adjust
the illumination brightness for the instru-
ment cluster.
To brighten illumination
왘Turn the reset knob in the instrument
cluster (컄page 22) clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
To dim illumination
왘Turn the reset knob in the instrument
cluster (컄page 22) counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
Coolant temperature gauge
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.
Warning! G
앫Driving when your engine is badly over-
heated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine com-
partment to catch fire. You could be se-
riously burned.
앫Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
103
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘Call up the trip odometer and main
odometer by pressing button è
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel (컄page 106).
왘Press button j or k until the
coolant temperature gauge appears.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
gine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Trip odometer
왘Check to see that the trip odometer
and main odometer (컄page 105) ap-
pear in the multifunction display.
왘Press and hold the reset knob on the in-
strument cluster (컄page 22) until the
trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer de-
notes excessive engine speed.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
i
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
a warning in the multifunction display
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious en-
gine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
104
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by com-
parison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
105
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the key in the starter switch is turned to
position 1. The control system enables you
to
앫call up information about your vehicle
앫change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control sys-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster dis-
play, and much more.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
Multifunction display
1Main odometer
2Trip odometer
3Automatic transmission program mode
4Current gear selector lever position
5Digital clock
6Outside temperature
i
The displays for the audio systems (ra-
dio, CD player, cassette player) will ap-
pear in English, regardless of the
language selected.
Warning! G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions per-
mit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 13.5 m) every second.
106
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
Pressing any of the buttons on the multi-
function steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunc-
tion display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or sub-
menus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
erations under
AUDIO
, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
1Multifunction display in the speed-
ometer
Operating the control system
2Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume
çdown / to decrease
æup / to increase
3Telephone*
íto take a call
ìto end a call
4Menu systems
èfor next menu
ÿfor previous menu
5Moving within a menu
jfor next display
kfor previous display
107
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being ar-
ranged in a circular pattern.
앫If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
앫If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the
SETTINGS
menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄page 114).
The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
108
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
109
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7
Commands/submenus
Standard dis-
play
AUDIO NAV* Malfunction
memory
Settings Trip computer Telephone
Coolant temper-
ature gauge
Select radio sta-
tion
Activate route
guidance
Call up malfunc-
tion messages
Reset to factory
settings
Fuel consumption
statistics after
start
Load phone
book
Digital speed-
ometer
Operate CD
player*
Instrument cluster
submenu
Fuel consumption
statistics since the
last reset
Search for name
in phone book
Call up FSS Operate cas-
sette player
Lighting submenu Call up range
Check engine oil
level
Vehicle submenu
Convenience sub-
menu
110
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
You can select the functions in the stan-
dard display menu with button k
or j.
The following functions are available:
Display digital speedometer
왘Press button j twice.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
AUDIO menu
The functions in the
AUDIO
menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message
AUDIO OFF
is shown in the
display.
The following functions are available:
i
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not neces-
sarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Function Page
Call up coolant temperature
gauge
102
Call up digital speedometer see
below
Call up FSS 238
Check engine oil level 227
Function Page
Select radio station 111
Operate CD player* 111
Operate cassette player 112
111
Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station
왘Turn on the radio (컄page 160). Vehi-
cles with COMAND*: Refer to separate
operating instructions.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned sta-
tion in the display.
1Station frequency
2Waveband setting
3Setting for station selection using
memory
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
The type of search depends on the set-
ting for the station tuning
(컄page 122):
앫The next stored station is selected
(SP)
앫Station search
Operate the CD player*
왘Turn on the radio and select the CD
player (컄page 160). Vehicles with CO-
MAND*: Refer to separate operating in-
structions.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.
1Current track
2Current CD (for CD changer*)
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio
(컄page 165). Vehicles with CO-
MAND*: Refer to separate operating in-
structions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
i
To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the audio system or
the COMAND* system key pad located
in the center dashboard.
112
Controls in detail
Control system
Operate the cassette player*
왘Turn on the radio and select the cas-
sette player (컄page 160). Vehicles
with COMAND*: Refer to separate op-
erating instructions.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the cassette cur-
rently being played are shown in the
display.
1Current side
왘Press button j to fast forward to
the next track.
왘Press button k to rewind the cas-
sette to the beginning of the current
track.
NAV menu
The
NAV
menu contains the functions need-
ed to operate your navigation system.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message
NAV
in the
display.
앫If the navigation system is switched off,
the message
NAV OFF
is shown in the
display.
앫If the navigation system is on, the mes-
sage
NAV ACTIVE
is shown in the dis-
play.
Please refer to the COMAND* manual for
instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.
Malfunction memory menu
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. What infor-
mation is shown in the display depends on
whether malfunctions have actually oc-
curred.
i
To select the reverse side of the tape,
press button below track number on
the audio system display, or enter re-
quest on the COMAND* system locat-
ed in the center dashboard.
Warning! G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are inten-
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a remind-
er with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄page 252).
113
Controls in detail
Control system
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the malfunction message
memory in the display.
No malfunction messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the mes-
sage in the display is:
NO MALFUNCTION
Malfunctions have occurred
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
the number of malfunctions in the display:
1Number of malfunctions
왘Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be dis-
played in order. See the “Practical
hints” section for malfunction and
warning messages (컄page 252).
Should any malfunctions occur while driv-
ing, the number of malfunctions will reap-
pear in the display when the key in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or re-
moved from the starter switch.
i
The message memory will be cleared
when you turn the key in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2. You will then
only see Priority 1 malfunctions
(컄page 252).
114
Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu
In the
SETTINGS
menu there are two func-
tions:
앫The function
RESET TO FACTORY SET-
TINGS
, with which you can reset all the
settings to the original factory settings.
앫A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the
SETTINGS
menu is seen in the
display.
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all sub-
menus to the factory settings.
왘Press the reset knob in the instrument
cluster (컄page 22) for approximately
three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset knob again to con-
firm.
왘Press the reset knob again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
Submenus in the Settings menu
왘Press button k or j.
In the display you see the collection of
the submenus.
왘Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset knob a second
time.
115
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting the functions of a submenu
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
왘Move to a function in the submenu.
왘Press the reset knob in the instrument
cluster for approximately three sec-
onds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset knob again to con-
firm.
왘Press the reset knob again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE
Set time (hours) Set daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
Set station selection mode
(radio)
Activate easy-entry/exit feature
Set time (minutes) Set locator lighting Set automatic locking Set key dependency
Select time display mode Exterior lamps delayed shut-off Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirror
Select temperature display
mode
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Select speedometer display
mode
Select language
Select display (speed display or
outside temperature)
116
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
submenu
via the
SETTINGS
menu. Use the
INSTRU-
MENT CLUSTER
submenu to change the in-
strument cluster display settings. The
following functions are available:
Set time (hours)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
IN-
STRUMENT CLUSTER
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
TIME SETTINGS – HOURS
.
The selection marker is on the hour set-
ting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the hour.
Set time (minutes)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
IN-
STRUMENT CLUSTER
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
TIME SETTINGS – MINUTES
.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the minutes.
Function Page
Set time (hours) see
below
Set time (minutes) see
below
Select time display mode 117
Select temperature display
mode
117
Select speedometer display
mode
117
Select language 118
Select display (speed display or
outside temperature)
118
117
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting time display mode
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
IN-
STRUMENT CLUSTER
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
12/24 Hour
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the
12h
or
24h
time display mode.
Selecting temperature display mode
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
IN-
STRUMENT CLUSTER
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
TEMP. INDICATOR
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set temperature
unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).
Selecting speedometer display mode
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
IN-
STRUMENT CLUSTER
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
DISPLAY VALUES IN
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set speedome-
ter unit to
km
or
miles
.
118
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
IN-
STRUMENT CLUSTER
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
TEXT
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the lan-
guage to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Available languages:
앫German
앫English
앫Italian
앫French
앫Spanish
Selecting display (speed display or out-
side temperature)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
IN-
STRUMENT CLUSTER
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
SELECT DISPLAY
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the dis-
play permanently shown in the multi-
function display.
119
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
Access the
LIGHTING
submenu via the
SET-
TINGS
menu. Use the
LIGHTING
submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
LIGHT-
ING
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select manual
or daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
With daytime running lamp mode se-
lected and the exterior lamp switch at
position 0, the following lamps will
come on automatically when the en-
gine is turned on:
앫Parking lamps and low beam head-
lamps
앫License plate lamps in low ambient
light conditions
Function Page
Set daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
see
below
Set locator lighting 120
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 120
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 121
i
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
For safety reasons, resetting the
LIGHTING
submenu to factory settings
(컄page 115) will not reset the daytime
running lamp mode.
In the display you will then see the mes-
sage:
LIGHTING – CANNOT BE COM-
PLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS
WHILE DRIVING
.
120
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting
During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting fea-
ture is activated, and the vehicle is un-
locked by remote control:
앫Parking lamps
앫Tail lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Front fog lamps
To activate locator lighting:
왘Make sure the function
LOCATOR
LIGHTING
is set.
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi-
tion U.
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off au-
tomatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
LIGHT-
ING
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
LOCATOR LIGHTING
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired setting.
The locator lighting will be switched on
or off.
Setting night security illumination
(Exterior lamps delayed shut-off)
Use the
HEADLAMPS DELAYED SHUT-OFF
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illumi-
nate during darkness after all doors are
closed.
When the delayed shut-off feature is acti-
vated and the exterior lamp switch is in po-
sition U, the following lamps will
remain lit after you remove the key from
the starter switch:
앫Parking lamps
앫Tail lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Front fog lamps
To activate night security illumination:
왘Select delayed shut-off period (see be-
low).
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi-
tion U.
i
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.
If you do not open a door after remov-
ing the key, the lamps will automatical-
ly switch off after 60 seconds.
121
Controls in detail
Control system
To select delayed shut-off period:
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
LIGHT-
ING
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
HEADLAMPS DELAYED SHUT-OFF
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired lamp-on period.
You can select:
앫
0 s
, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated
앫
15 s
,
30 s
,
45 s
or
60 s
, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated
You can temporarily deactivate the de-
layed shut-off feature:
왘Before leaving the vehicle turn the key
in the starter switch to position 0.
왘Then turn it to position 2 and back
to 0.
The delayed shut-off feature is deacti-
vated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the key in the starter switch.
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior light-
ing to remain lit during darkness after the
key is removed from the starter switch.
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
LIGHT-
ING
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
INT. LIGHTING DELAYED SHUT-
OFF
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired lamp-on time period. You can se-
lect:
앫
0 s
, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated
앫
5 s,
10 s
,
15 s
or
20 s
, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated
122
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu
Access the
VEHICLE
submenu via the
SET-
TINGS
menu. Use the
VEHICLE
submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The follow-
ing functions are available:
Setting station selection mode
Use the
PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE
function to select the manual or memory
station selection mode for the radio
(컄page 111).
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
VEHI-
CLE
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired station selection mode. You can
select:
앫
STATION SEARCH
앫
MEMORY
selects next stored station
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the au-
tomatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Vehicle
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to switch
AUTOMAT-
IC DOOR LOCK
ON
or
OFF
.
Function Page
Set station selection mode
(radio)
see be-
low
Set automatic locking see
below
123
Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu
Access the
CONVENIENCE
submenu via the
SETTINGS
menu. Use the
CONVENIENCE
sub-
menu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deacti-
vate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
feature is activated, the steering wheel and
driver’s seat will move back to facilitate ex-
iting when you
앫remove the key from the starter switch
앫open the driver’s door
However, the engine must be turned off.
After entering the vehicle, the steering
wheel and seat will move into the position
stored in memory when
앫the driver’s door is closed
앫you put the key in the starter switch
and
앫press the appropriate stored position
button on the memory switch
(컄page 94)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
CONVE-
NIENCE
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Function Page
Activate easy-entry/exit feature see
below
Set key dependency 124
Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirror
124
Warning! G
You must make sure that no one can be-
come trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
the easy-entry/exit feature is activated and
the driver’s door is being opened or the key
is removed from the starter switch. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i
To cancel seat/steering wheel move-
ment, do one of the following:
앫Press the seat adjustment
switch*(컄page 34).
앫Move the steering column stalk*
(컄page 38).
앫Press the memory switch
(컄page 94).
124
Controls in detail
Control system
왘Press æ or ç to change the
easy-entry/exit setting.
The following settings are available for
the easy-entry/exit feature:
Setting key dependency
Use this function to set whether the mem-
ory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel and the mirrors should be stored
separately for each key (컄page 93).
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
CONVE-
NIENCE
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set key depen-
dency to
ON
or
OFF
.
Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the
MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
function to select whether the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneu-
vers, when reverse gear is engaged. For
additional information, see “Activating ex-
terior rear view mirror parking position ”
(컄page 140).
You can store a parking position for the
passenger exterior rear view mirror using
the memory switch (컄page 95).
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
CONVE-
NIENCE
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
.
OFF
The easy-en-
try/exit feature
is deactivated.
STEERING COLUMN
Only the steer-
ing column is
moved.
STEERING COLUMN +
SEAT
Both the steer-
ing column and
the seat are
moved.
125
Controls in detail
Control system
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to switch function
ON
or
OFF
.
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Fuel consumption statistics after start
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the multi-
function display:
AFTER START
.
1Distance driven since start
2Time elapsed since start
3Average fuel consumption since start
4Average speed since start
Fuel consumption since last reset
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
After RESET
.
1Distance driven since last reset
2Time elapsed since last reset
3Average fuel consumption since last re-
set
4Average speed since last reset
Function Page
Fuel consumption statistics after
start
see
below
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
125
Call up range (distance to empty) 126
126
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
왘Press and hold the reset knob in the in-
strument cluster (컄page 22) until the
value is reset to
0
.
Call up range (distance to empty)
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
RANGE
.
In the display you will see the calculat-
ed range based on the current fuel tank
level.
TEL menu*
i
All statistics stored since the last en-
gine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the key in the starter
switch is turned to position 0 or re-
moved from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
key back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
Warning! G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
phone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the tele-
phone when weather, road and traffic condi-
tions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
hicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec-
ond.
127
Controls in detail
Control system
You can use the functions in the
TEL
menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘Switch on the telephone and
COMAND*.
왘Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the
TEL
menu in the display.
Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
앫If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is:
TEL OFF
.
앫If the telephone is on:
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display is
empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network,
READY
is indicated in the dis-
play.
1Signal strength
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can op-
erate it using the control system.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
i
Vehicles with audio system:
In top right corner; the higher the num-
ber, the stronger the signal received
from the net.
Vehicles with COMAND:
In top left corner; the higher the num-
ber of bars, the stronger the signal re-
ceived from the net.
128
Controls in detail
Control system
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:
왘Press button í.
You have answered the call. In the dis-
play you see the length of the call.
Ending a call
왘Press button ì.
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby mes-
sage.
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the
TEL
menu in the dis-
play.
왘Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
PLEASE WAIT!
.
When the message
PLEASE WAIT!
dis-
appears, the phone book has been
loaded.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in in-
creasing or decreasing alphabetical or-
der.
왘Press button í.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫If connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
앫If no connection is made, the con-
trol system stores the dialed num-
ber in the redial memory.
i
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing ì.
129
Controls in detail
Control system
Redialing
The control system stores the most recent-
ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the
TEL
menu in the dis-
play.
왘Press button í.
In the display you see the first number
in the redial memory.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
왘Press button í.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
130
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
Manual transmission
Information for driving with a manual
transmission is found in the “Getting start-
ed” section (컄page 41).
Gearshift lever
Do not exceed the maximum speed in the
individual gears. Refer to tachometer
(컄page 22) for engine speeds.
Warning! G
For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-
mission, getting out of your vehicle with the
gearshift lever not engaged in 1st or reverse
gear and parking brake engaged is danger-
ous. Also, when parked on an incline, an en-
gaged 1st or reverse gear alone may not
prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects
Always set the parking brake in addition to
engaging 1st or reverse gear (컄page 51).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheel towards the road curb.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could move the gearshift
lever, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
131
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
Shifting into reverse
왘Stop the vehicle completely.
왘Pull gearshift lever up and shift in
Rreverse.
!
Downshifting gears leading to overrev-
ving the engine can result in engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not exceed the engine speed limits
(컄page 310).
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill
by using the clutch pedal. The clutch
may be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran-
ty.
132
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Automatic transmission*
Information for driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the “Getting start-
ed” section (컄page 41).
Your transmission adapts its gear shifting
process to your individual driving style by
continually adjusting the shift points up or
down. These shift point adjustments are
performed based on current operating and
driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change the au-
tomatic transmission reacts by adjusting
its gear shift program.
The automatic transmission selects indi-
vidual gears automatically, depending on
앫the selector lever position D with gear
ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄page 134)
앫the selected shift program (W/S)
(컄page 136)
앫the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄page 137)
앫the vehicle speed
The current selector lever position and
shift program (W/S) appear in the multi-
function display (컄page 22).
An additional indication of the current se-
lector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting gate. The indicators
come on when you activate a switch (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door)
and go out after approximately
15 minutes.
When the selector lever is in position D,
you can influence transmission shifting by
앫limiting the gear range
앫changing gears yourself
i
During the brief warm-up the transmis-
sion upshifting is delayed. This allows
the catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperatures.
Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the en-
gine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
133
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears yourself when the
selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘Briefly press the selector lever to the
left in the D– direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action si-
multaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄page 134).
Upshifting
왘Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simulta-
neously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Canceling gear range limit
왘Press and hold the selector lever in the
D+ direction until D reappears in the
tachometer display field.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D– direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal accelera-
tion and deceleration. This will involve
shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the selector lever is moved to the
D– direction, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
134
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Gear ranges
With the selector lever in position D, you
can limit the transmission’s gear range by
pressing the lever to the left (D-), and re-
verse the gear range limit by pressing the
lever to the right (D+).
The selected gear range will appear in the
tachometer display field. If you press on
the accelerator when the engine has
reached its rpm limit, the transmission will
upshift beyond any gear range limit
selected.
Gear
range
Effect
éThe transmission shifts
through fourth gear only.
èThe transmission shifts
through third gear only.
With this selection you can
use the braking effect of the
engine.
Gear
range
Effect
çThe transmission shifts
through second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
앫on steep downgrades
앫in mountainous regions
앫under extreme operating
conditions
æThe transmission operates
only in first gear
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep
or lengthy downgrades.
135
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Gear selector lever position
Effect
PPark position
Selector position when the vehicle is
parked. Only place selector lever in
position P when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended to
serve as a brake when the vehicle is
parked. Rather, the driver should al-
ways set the parking brake in addi-
tion to placing the selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
The key can only be removed from
the starter switch with the selector
lever in position P. With the key re-
moved the selector lever is locked in
position P.
RReverse gear
Place selector lever in position R only
when vehicle is stopped.
Effect
NNeutral
No power is transmitted from the en-
gine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle can
be moved freely (pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission,
never engage N while driving.
If ESP is deactivated or malfunction-
ing:
Only move selector lever to N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g.
on icy roads).
DDrive
The transmission shifts automatical-
ly. All five forward gears are avail-
able.
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N
can result in transmission damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dan-
gerous. Also, position P alone is not intend-
ed to or capable of preventing your vehicle
from moving, possibly hitting people or ob-
jects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄page 51).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
136
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Program mode selector switch
1Program mode selector switch
S Standard For regular driving
W Winter For winter driving
왘Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the letter of the
desired shift program appears in the
multifunction display (컄page 105).
Select
W
for winter driving:
앫The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫Traction and driving stability are im-
proved on icy roads.
앫Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
앫The power transmission ratio for se-
lector lever position R changes de-
pending on the program mode
selected (
W
or
S
).
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could move the selector le-
ver from position P, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
!
Never change the program mode when
the selector lever is out of position P. It
could result in a change of driving char-
acteristics for which you may not be
prepared.
137
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the transmis-
sion’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
More throttle Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
mission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only 2nd gear and reverse gear can
be activated.
왘Stop the vehicle.
왘Move selector lever to P.
왘Turn off the engine.
왘Wait at least ten seconds before re-
starting.
왘Restart the engine.
왘Move selector lever to position D (for
2nd gear) or R.
왘Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
138
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄page 48) and for setting the rear view
mirrors (컄page 39) is found in the “Get-
ting started” section.
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror, antiglare posi-
tion
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night posi-
tion using the lever at its lower edge.
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror*
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the inside rear view mirror will respond au-
tomatically to glare when
앫the ignition is switched on, and
앫incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the inside rear view mir-
ror.
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫reverse gear is engaged
앫the interior lighting is turned on
Warning! G
The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.
The inside rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sun-
shade is in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others.
139
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Warning! G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
side rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
140
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored positions.
왘Make sure you stored a parking posi-
tion for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄page 95)
왘Make sure that the
MIRROR SETTING
WHEN PARKING
function, found under
the
CONVENIENCE
submenu in the con-
trol system, is switched to
ON
(컄page 124).
왘Switch on ignition.
왘Press button 2 (컄page 40) for the pas-
senger-side exterior rear view mirror.
왘Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R .
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward in the
stored position.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
앫10 seconds after you put the gear se-
lector lever out of position R
앫immediately once you exceed a vehicle
speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
앫immediately when you press the button
for driver’s side mirror (컄page 40)
Headlamp cleaning system*
The switch is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
1Headlamp washer switch
왘Switch on ignition.
왘Press switch 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
Information on filling up the washer reser-
voir can be found in the “Operation” sec-
tion (컄page 232).
141
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
왘Swing sun visors down when you expe-
rience glare.
1Mounting
2Mirror cover
3Mirror lamp
4Sun visor
왘To use mirror, lift up cover 2.
Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
i
If sunlight enters through a side win-
dow, disengage sun visor from
mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
The mirror lamp 3 will switch off.
142
Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control
143
Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control panel The storage compartment between the
front seats can be ventilated (컄page 148).
Information about rear passenger com-
partment adjustable air vents
(컄page 149).
Item
1Climate control panel
2Left center air vent, adjustable
3Right center air vent, adjustable
4Air volume control for left center air
vent
5Air volume control for right center
air vent
6Air volume control for side air vent
7Side air vent, adjustable
8Side defroster vent, fixed
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the slid-
ers for the center air vents to the mid-
dle position.
Item
1Air volume control
2Left-side temperature control
3Right-side temperature control
4Air distribution control switch
5Rear window defroster
6AC cooling on/off
7Air distribution and air volume
(automatic)
8Air recirculation
9Defrosting
144
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev-
er the engine is running. You can operate
the climate control system in either the au-
tomatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the se-
lected interior temperature and the cur-
rent outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected
(컄page 148)
Warning! G
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
145
Controls in detail
Climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 2 and 3 to sepa-
rately adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature set-
ting in small increments, preferably start-
ing at 72°F (22°C).
Increasing
왘Turn the control slightly to the right.
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Decreasing
왘Turn the control slightly to the left.
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Adjusting air distribution and volume
Use the air distribution control 4
(컄page 143) to adjust the air distribution.
The following symbols are found on the
controls:
Adjusting manually
왘Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘Select any of the six air volume speeds
using the air volume control 1
(컄page 143) and the air distribution.
Adjusting automatically
왘Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air distribution and vol-
ume is adjusted automatically.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘Switch to manual mode.
왘Turn the air distribution control
to a or Y.
Symbol Function
aDirects air through the
center, side and rear pas-
senger compartment air
vents
ZDirects air to the windows
XDirects air into the entire
vehicle interior
YDirects air to the footwells
146
Controls in detail
Climate control
Defrosting
Activating
왘Press button P (컄page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on
or
왘Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
Press button O (컄page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘Close center air vents.
왘Open left and right side air vents and
adjust side air vents upwards.
Deactivating
왘Press button P (컄page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘Press button O (컄page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Warning! G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
i
If you keep button O pressed the
side windows and panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof will be closed.
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside tempera-
tures.
If you have turned off the air condition-
ing (컄page 148) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
147
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating
왘Press button O (컄page 143)
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫after five minutes if the outside temper-
ature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
앫after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off
앫after 30 minutes if the outside temper-
ature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated af-
ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper-
ation depending on the outside
temperature.
Activating
왘Press button F (컄page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
Deactivating
왘Press button F (컄page 143) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
If you keep button O pressed the
side windows and panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof will be returned to
their previous position.
Warning! G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driv-
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts blinking, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operat-
ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
cient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster au-
tomatically turns itself back on.
148
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
tioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘Press button ACOFF (컄page 143).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF lights up.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
ing.
왘Press ACOFF again (컄page 143).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF goes out.
The air conditioning system uses the refrig-
erant R134a. This refrigerant is free of
CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.
Ventilated storage compartment
The front center console storage compart-
ment has its own air vent that allows for
cooling ventilation when the climate con-
trol system is activated.
1Lever
i
Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air con-
ditioning system is losing refrigerant.
The compressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning system
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
You should keep this air vent closed
when outside temperatures are low.
149
Controls in detail
Climate control
Opening the air vent
왘Raise lever 1.
Closing the air vent
왘Lower lever 1.
Rear passenger compartment adjust-
able air vents
1Left center air vent
2Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
3Right center air vent
To open center air vents:
왘Turn thumbwheel 2 upward.
Deactivating the climate control sys-
tem
Deactivating
왘Set the air volume control
(컄page 143) to position 0.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Reactivating
왘Set the air volume control
(컄page 143) to any speed.
i
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compart-
ment, close the air vent while heating
the passenger compartment.
!
Do not obstruct the air vent in the stor-
age compartment.
i
The temperature at the air vents for
rear passenger compartment 1 and 3
is the same as at the dashboard center
air vents.
150
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
151
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Automatic climate control panel
Item
1Automatic climate control panel
2Left center air vent, adjustable
3Right center air vent, adjustable
4Air volume control for left center air
vent
5Thumbwheel for adding outside air
6Air volume control for right center
air vent
7Air volume control for side air vent
8Side air vent, adjustable
9Side defroster vent, fixed
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the slid-
ers for the center air vents to the mid-
dle position.
Item
1Temperature control, left, raising
2Left-side air distribution control
(automatic or manual operation)
3Activated charcoal filter
4Display
5Right-side air distribution control
(automatic or manual operation)
6Temperature control, right, raising
7Temperature control, right, lower-
ing
8Rear window defroster
9AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
Residual heat/ventilation
10 Air volume control
11 Automatic climate control on/off
(complete system)
12 Air recirculation
13 Defrosting
14 Temperature control, left, lowering
152
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
The automatic climate control is operation-
al whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in ei-
ther the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depend-
ing on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the economy mode ACOFF mode
is selected (컄page 151).
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 1 and 14 for the
left side or 6 and 7 for the right side to
separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).
Increasing
왘Push temperature control 1 and/or 6.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Decreasing
왘Push temperature control 7
and/or 14.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Adding outside air
왘Turn thumbwheel 5 in dashboard
(컄page 150) to increase flow of out-
side air through air vents for center, left
and right sides and rear passenger
compartment.
Warning! G
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
ture, air volume and air distribution.
153
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution controls 2 and 5
(컄page 151) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:
Adjusting manually
왘Press left or right U button.
The air distribution can be adjusted
manually.
Adjusting automatically
왘Press left or right U button again.
The air distribution is adjusted auto-
matically.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘Switch to manual mode.
왘Turn the air distribution control
to a or Y.
Adjusting air volume
Adjusting manually
Seven blower speeds are available.
왘Press left M or right Q side of air
volume control switch until the re-
quested blower speed is attained.
The display “Auto” disappears and the
automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in the
display.
Adjusting automatically
왘Press left or right U button.
The air volume is adjusted automatical-
ly.
Symbol Function
aDirects air through the
center, side and rear pas-
senger compartment air
vents
ZDirects air to the windows
XDirects air into the entire
vehicle interior
YDirects air to the footwells
154
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display “AUTO MAXCOOL” ap-
pears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
panorama sliding/pop-up roof* are
closed).
Defrosting
Activating
왘Press button P (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up
왘Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
왘Press button O (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘Close center air vents.
왘Adjust side air vents upwards.
Deactivating
왘Press button P (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘Press button O (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Warning! G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
155
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Deactivating
왘Press button O (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫after five minutes if the outside temper-
ature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
앫after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off
앫after 30 minutes if the outside temper-
ature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof will be closed.
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically:
앫at high outside temperatures
앫if the concentration of carbon mon-
oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out-
side air increases, for example in a
tunnel (charcoal filter activated)
The charcoal filter must be activated
(컄page 156) for the air recirculation
mode to be activated automatically.
If you have turned off the air condition-
ing (컄page 157) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
i
If you keep button O pressed the
side windows and the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof will be returned to
their previous position.
156
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Charcoal filter
An activated charcoal filter markedly re-
duces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compart-
ment.
Activating
왘Press button e (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases
beyond a predetermined level.
Deactivating
왘Press button e (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if economy mode ACOFF is se-
lected or if the outside temperature has
fallen below 41°F (5°C).
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the
inside, or if the passenger compartment
needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated af-
ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper-
ation depending on the outside
temperature.
Activating
왘Press button F (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
Deactivating
왘Press button F (컄page 151) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof* will be closed.
i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof will be returned to
their previous position.
157
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
tioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehi-
cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu-
midified.
왘Press button ACOFF (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF lights up.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
ing.
왘Press ACOFF again (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF goes out.
The air conditioning system uses the refrig-
erant R134a. This refrigerant is free of
CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.
Warning! G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driv-
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts blinking, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operat-
ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
cient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster au-
tomatically turns itself back on.
i
Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air con-
ditioning system is losing refrigerant.
The compressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning system
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
158
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Residual heat and ventilation*
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or remove it from the starter
switch.
왘Press button T (컄page 151)
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
Deactivating
왘Press button T (컄page 151).
The indicator lamp on button T
goes off.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫when the ignition is switched on
앫after about 30 minutes
앫if the battery voltage drops
Rear passenger compartment adjust-
able air vents
Adjusting the air volume
왘Turn thumbwheel 2.
i
How long the system will provide heat-
ing depends on the coolant tempera-
ture and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu-
tion control setting.
Item
1Left center air vent
2Thumbwheel
3Right center air vent
4Air vent, closed
5Air vent, opened
6Blower
i
Four blower speeds are available.
The temperature at the air vents for
rear passenger compartment 1 and 3
is the same as at the dashboard center
air vents.
159
Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation
These instructions are intended to help
you become acquainted with your
Mercedes-Benz car radio. They contain
useful tips and a detailed description of the
user functions.
Operating safety
Warning! G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, system settings should
be entered with the vehicle at standstill and
systems should be operated by the driver
only when traffic conditions permit. Always
pay full attention to traffic conditions first
before operating system controls while driv-
ing.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is cover-
ing a distance of approximately 44 feet (ap-
proximately 13.5 m) every second.1
1The right to correct errors and make technical
amendments is reserved.
Warning! G
Any alterations made to electronic compo-
nents can cause malfunctions.
The radio, cassette deck, CD changer*, tele-
phone* and voice control system* are inter-
connected. When one of the components is
not operational or has not been
removed/replaced properly, the function of
other components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the op-
erating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
160
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
161
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item Page
1CD mode selector 172
2Manual tuning
(radio)
166
Fast forward/reverse
(cassette, CD)
170,
174
Speed dialing memory
(telephone*)
179
3Radio mode selector 165
4Display
Item Page
5Alpha-numeric keypad
Band selection,
station buttons (radio)
165
CD selection (CD) 173
Telephone number entry,
retrieving speed dialing
memory (telephone*)
176
6Scanning (radio, cas-
sette, CD)
167,
170,
174
7Function button 166
8Soft keys 162
Item Page
9Cassette eject 169
10 Cassette mode selector 168
11 Telephone* mode selec-
tor
176
12 Seek tuning (radio) 166
Track search (cassette,
CD)
169,
174
Speed dialing memory
(telephone*)
179
13 On /off 162
Volume 162
162
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric
keypad (right side of radio face) and the
function buttons (left side of the radio
face) are referred to as “buttons” and the
four keys under the display are referred to
as “soft keys”.
Operation
Switching on/off
Switching on:
왘Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
starter switch.
or
왘Turn control knob a.
Switching off:
왘Remove the key from the starter
switch.
or
왘Turn control knob a.
Adjusting the volume
왘Turn control knob a.
The volume will increase or decrease
according to the direction turned.
Adjusting audio functions
In radio, cassette and CD mode, press the
AUD key to call up the bass, treble, bal-
ance and fader functions.
Settings for bass and treble are stored sep-
arately for the AM (medium wave, long
wave, short wave) and FM (ultra-short
wave) frequency bands, cassette mode
and CD mode.
i
Do not press directly on the radio dis-
play face.
i
If the radio is turned on without the key
in the ignition, it will automatically turn
off again after approx. 30 minutes.
i
If your vehicle was equipped with a
telephone* and voice control system*,
and both are connected to the car ra-
dio, their volume can be adjusted sepa-
rately while the telephone* is being
used or voice control system* is acti-
vated.
163
Controls in detail
Audio system
Bass
왘In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the
AUD
key repeatedly until
BASS
ap-
pears on the display.
왘Press the
+
or
-
key to increase or de-
crease the tone level accordingly.
or
왘Press both the
+
and
-
keys simulta-
neously to reset the bass tones to the
center (flat) level.
Treble
왘In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the
AUD
key repeatedly until
TREBLE
ap-
pears on the display.
왘Press the
+
or
-
key to increase or de-
crease the tone level accordingly.
or
왘Press both the
+
and
-
keys simulta-
neously to reset the treble tones to
their center (flat) level.
Fader
왘In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the
AUD
key repeatedly until
FADER
ap-
pears on the display.
왘Press the
F
or
R
key to shift the sound
accordingly.
or
왘Press both the
F
and
R
keys simulta-
neously to reset the fader to its center
level.
i
Your vehicle may or may not have the
fader function, depending on the vehi-
cle equipment and model.
164
Controls in detail
Audio system
Balance
왘In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the
AUD
key repeatedly until
BALANCE
appears on the display.
왘Press the
L
or
R
key to shift the sound
accordingly.
or
왘Press both the
L
and
R
keys simulta-
neously to reset the balance to its cen-
ter level.
Returning audio functions to factory set-
tings
왘In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
and hold the
AUD
key longer than 2 sec-
onds.
RESET
will appear on the display.
All settings for bass, treble and balance
are returned to center and the volume
is set to a predefined level.
Audio system sound selection (EXT)*
왘In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the
AUD
key.
The sound settings menu appears on
the display.
왘Press the
EXT
key.
왘Press one of the function keys.
You can select from among the follow-
ing settings:
앫
DRV
: The tone level is set to the
“Driver” position, sound is directed
toward the passengers.
165
Controls in detail
Audio system
앫
SP
: The tone level is set for
“Speech”, optimizing the sound for
spoken language.
앫
AMB
: The tone level is set for “Ambi-
ence”, producing a three-dimen-
sional sound.
앫
OFF
: The audio system sound selec-
tion is turned off.
Telephone* muting
If a telephone has been installed in the ve-
hicle, the radio will switch to telephone
mode when a call is received. The current
audio source is muted.
Radio mode
Selecting radio mode
왘Press the b button.
Selecting the band
You can select from among FM, AM or WB
frequency bands.
FM frequency band:
FM (ultra-short wave) 87.9......107.9 MHz
AM frequency bands:
MW (medium wave) 530......1710 KHz
WB (long wave) approx. 162 KHz
Selecting FM band
왘Press the
FM
function button.
FM
appears in the upper right-hand cor-
ner of the display.
Selecting AM band
왘Press the
AM
function button.
AM
appears in the upper right-hand cor-
ner of the display.
Selecting a station
The following options are available for se-
lecting a station:
앫Direct frequency band input
앫Manual tuning
앫Automatic seek tuning
앫Scan tuning
앫Station buttons
앫Automatic station memory (Autostore)
166
Controls in detail
Audio system
Direct frequency input (AM and FM only)
Select the desired frequency band.
왘Press the “ button.
왘Enter the desired frequency with the
buttons 1 to 0.
Manual tuning
왘Select the desired band.
왘Press and hold either the d or c
button until the desired frequency is
reached.
Step-by-step station tuning takes place
in ascending or descending order of
frequency. The first three tuning steps
will take place without muting. After-
ward, the radio will be muted and
high-speed tuning will take place until
the button is released.
Automatic seek tuning
왘Select the desired frequency band.
왘Press either the f or e button.
The radio will tune to the next receiv-
able station at a higher or lower fre-
quency.
i
You can only enter frequencies within
the respective waveband.
If a button is not pressed within 4 sec-
onds, the radio will return to the last
tuned station.
167
Controls in detail
Audio system
Scan tuning
앫Starting scan tuning
왘Select the desired frequency band.
왘Press the 2 button.
SC will appear on the display. The
radio briefly tunes into all receiv-
able stations on the band selected.
The first scan will tune only the sta-
tions with a strong signal. The sec-
ond scan will tune every receivable
station.
앫Ending scan tuning
왘Press the 2 button or the d,
c, f or e button.
SC
disappears from the display.
Station memory
You can store 10 AM and 10 FM stations.
앫Storing stations
왘Tune in the desired station.
왘Press and hold the desired station
button 1 to 0 until a brief signal
tone is heard.
The frequency is stored on the se-
lected station button.
앫Retrieving a station from memory
왘Press the desired station button 1
to 0.
Storing stations automatically
(Autostore)
The Autostore memory function provides
an additional memory level. The station
memory for manually stored stations is not
erased.
앫Calling up the Autostore memory level
왘Briefly press the
AS
key.
AS
appears on the display in in-
versed-color format.
The radio finds the 10 stations with
the strongest signals. These sta-
tions are stored on the station but-
tons 1 to 0 in the order of signal
strength.
앫Retrieving a station from memory
왘Press the desired station button 1
to 0.
앫Leaving the Autostore memory level
왘Press the
AS
key.
AS
appears on the display in in-
versed-color format.
168
Controls in detail
Audio system
Weather band
왘Press the
WB
key.
The last weather band station is tuned
in.
왘Select the desired weather band sta-
tion with buttons 1 to 7.
If a station cannot be tuned in, a scan
is automatically started.
왘Press the f or e button. The
next receivable weather band station is
tuned in.
Cassette mode
Playing cassettes
왘Press the 3 button.
The display folds down and the cas-
sette slot becomes visible.
왘Press the cassette into the slot until it
engages and tap it gently.
The cassette will be pulled in automati-
cally. The system switches to cassette
mode (
TAPE
). Track 1 will be played and
SIDE 1
appears in the display. Track 1
is the side of the cassette which is fac-
ing upward. The cassette deck will au-
tomatically detect the type of tape.
왘Fold the display back up and press gen-
tly on the display frame to lock in place.
or
왘If a cassette is already in the mecha-
nism, press the j button.
Track selection
왘Press the
TRK
key.
Upon selection of the track, the display
shows
SIDE 1
or
SIDE 2
corresponding-
ly.
왘You can switch track sides at any time.
The track side will be changed auto-
matically at the end of the tape.
i
Do not press directly on the display
face.
i
A warning signal will sound after 20
seconds if the display is left in the
down position. If the display is not
closed, a warning signal will sound and
the radio will be muted.
169
Controls in detail
Audio system
Cassette eject
왘Press the eject button 3.
The display will fold down and the cas-
sette will be ejected. The system will
switch back to radio mode automatical-
ly.
왘Fold the display back up.
Track search
Track search forward
왘Press the f button.
SEEK FWD
will appear in the display. The
track search will run the tape forward
to the start of the next track and switch
to play.
Track search backward
왘Press the e button.
SEEK RWD
will appear on the display.
The track search will run the tape back-
ward to the start of the track currently
playing and switch to play.
Stopping track search
왘Press the d, c, f or e
button.
The cassette will switch over to Play.
i
The cassette will not be ejected when
the system is switched off or switched
to another operating mode.
i
The cassette will not be ejected when
the system is switched off or switched
to another operating mode.
170
Controls in detail
Audio system
Scanning
왘Press the 2 button.
SC
will appear on the display.
Each track on the cassette will be
played briefly in ascending order.
Stopping scan:
왘Press the 2, d, c, f or
e button.
The system will switch to Play.
Fast forward/reverse
Starting cassette fast forward mode:
왘Press the d button.
FORWARD
will appear on the display.
Starting cassette fast reverse mode:
왘Press the c button.
REWIND
will appear on the display.
The cassette will automatically switch over
to the play mode at the end or beginning of
the tape.
Stopping the cassette fast forward/re-
verse mode:
왘Press the d, c, f or e
button.
The cassette will switch over to the
play mode.
171
Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping blank sections (skip blank)
Switching on the skip blank function
왘Press the
SB
key.
SB
appears on the display in in-
versed-color format.
If the system does not detect a sound
signal, the cassette will automatically
fast forward to the next sound signal.
Switching off the skip blank function
왘Press the
SB
key.
The inversed-color
SB
display disap-
pears.
Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)
To enable optimum sound reproduction of
cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR1, the
Dolby NR1 system should be switched on.
Switching on
왘Press the
NR
key.
NR
appears on the display in in-
versed-color format.
Switching off
왘Press the
NR
key again.
The inversed-color
NR
display disa-
pears.
1DOLBY and the double-D symbol Ù are trade-
marks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora-
tion.
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
i
The Dolby NR1 function should be
switched off when playing cassettes
not recorded with Dolby B NR1.
172
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD changer* operating mode
General notes
Should excessively high temperatures oc-
cur while in CD mode,
CD TEMP HIGH
will
appear on the display and muting will take
place. The unit will then switch back to the
last operating mode used until the temper-
ature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
Should excessively low temperatures oc-
cur while in CD mode,
CD TEMP LOW
will ap-
pear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interfer-
ence during playback. Avoid fingerprints
and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
apply any label or other material to them.
Use only original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.
Clean CDs from time to time with a com-
mercially available cleaning cloth. No sol-
vents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be
used for cleaning. Replace the CD in its
case after use. Protect CDs from heat and
direct sunlight.
Only use CDs, which bear the label shown
and that conform to the compact disc dig-
ital audio standard (IEC 60908).
Use of CDs which do not meet this stan-
dard may cause damage to the CD chang-
er. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an
adapter.
Operational readiness of CD changer
If a CD changer has been installed in the
system, it can be operated from the front
control panel of the radio. A loaded maga-
zine must be installed for CD playing.
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
왘Slide the changer door to the right and
press the eject button 3.
왘The magazine will be ejected.
Warning! G
The CD changer* is a Class 1 laser product.
There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer*
does not contain any parts which can be ser-
viced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.
컄컄
173
Controls in detail
Audio system
1CD
2CD changer
3CD tray
4CD magazine
왘Remove the magazine and pull the CD
tray fully out.
왘Place the CD in the recess of the tray,
label side up.
왘Push the tray into the magazine in the
direction shown by the arrow.
왘Push the magazine into the CD changer
in the direction shown by the arrow and
close the sliding door.
Playing CDs
왘Press the i button.
CD
will appear on the display.
The CD most recently listened to will then
start playing at the point where it was last
switched off.
After the last track on a CD has finished,
the next CD is automatically played.
Selecting CDs
왘You can select from among the CDs in
the CD magazine using buttons 1 to 6.
CD
and the magazine slot number of the
selected CD appear on the display. The
number of the current track is dis-
played after
TRACK
.
If there is no CD in the selected maga-
zine slot,
NO CD
appears on the display
with the corresponding slot number.
i
CDs which have been inserted improp-
erly or are unreadable will not be
played.
174
Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping tracks forward/backward
Skipping tracks forward:
왘Press the f button.
The next track will be played.
Skipping tracks backward:
왘Press the e button.
If the track has been playing for more
than 10 seconds, it will revert to the
start of that track. If it has been playing
for less than 10 seconds, it will revert
to the preceding track.
Repeated pressing of the f or e
button will result in multiple tracks being
skipped.
Fast forward/reverse
Fast forward:
왘Press and hold the d button until
the desired location has been reached.
Reverse:
왘Press and hold the c button until
the desired location has been reached.
Scanning
Starting scan:
왘Press the 2 button.
SC
appears in the display.
Each track on the current CD will be
played for approx. 8 seconds in as-
cending order.
Ending scan:
왘Press the 2 button, d, c,
f or e button.
i
The relative time of the track is shown
on the display during search.
175
Controls in detail
Audio system
Random play
The random play function (RDM) plays the
tracks on the current CD in random order.
Switching on random play:
왘Press the
RDM
key.
RDM
appears on the display in in-
versed-color format.
Switching off random play:
왘Press the
RDM
key again.
The inversed-color
RDM
display disap-
pears.
Repeat
The repeat function (RPT) repeats the cur-
rent track.
Switching on repeat:
왘Press the
RPT
key.
RPT
appears on the display in in-
versed-color format.
Switching off repeat:
왘Press the
RPT
key again.
The inversed-color
RPT
display disap-
pears.
Track and time display
왘Press the
T
key.
The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.
왘Press the
T
key again.
The total number of tracks and the total
playing time of the CD appear in the
display.
The CD main menu appears again after
8seconds.
i
The Random play and Repeat function
cannot be used simultaneously.
176
Controls in detail
Audio system
Telephone* operation
Various car telephone functions and oper-
ating steps for the car telephone can be
performed and displayed via the audio sys-
tem.
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating instruc-
tions for the multifunction steering wheel,
voice control system* and the car tele-
phone.
Switching on the telephone
왘Press the h button.
왘If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must input
the code now.
왘Press the
OK
key.
The telephone is unlocked. If you enter
the wrong code, you must re-enter the
correct code.
Switching off the telephone
왘Press the h button repeatedly until
PHONE OFF
appears in the display.
The receiving symbol in the display dis-
appears.
Adjusting the volume
왘Turn control knob a during tele-
phone operation.
The volume increases or decreases de-
pending on the direction in which the
knob is turned.
Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and start-
ing the dialing process
왘Enter the desired telephone number
using buttons 1 to 0.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only 17 of these are visible on the
display.
왘If necessary, correct the number en-
tered with the
CLR
key. Press the key
briefly to delete the last digit entered,
press the key and hold to delete the
complete number.
왘After the correct telephone number
has been entered, press the
SND
key.
i
The volume can be adjusted separately
for the telephone, voice control
system* and radio.
177
Controls in detail
Audio system
Telephone book
The numbers stored in the telephone book
can be called up by either name or number.
Calling up the telephone book
왘Press either the d, c, f or
e button.
Switching between name search and
number search
왘Press the
ABC
key.
The name search is called up.
or
왘Press the
NUM
key.
The number search is called up.
Searching and calling up telephone book
entries by name
왘Press the
ABC
key.
The current name is marked on the dis-
play.
왘Press either the d or c button.
The stored entries are selected accord-
ing to alphabetical order of initial let-
ters.
or
왘Press the f or e button.
The stored entries are selected in in-
crements of 4.
or
왘Press the desired numerical key 2 to 9.
The stored entries are selected accord-
ing to alphabetical initial letters (e.g.
for
B
-Brown, press button 2 twice).
i
A number of characters and symbols
cannot be shown on the display for
technical reasons, they have been re-
placed with spaces.
178
Controls in detail
Audio system
Searching and selecting telephone book
entries by number
왘Press the
NUM
key.
The current number is marked in the
display.
왘Press either the d or c button.
The stored entries are selected accord-
ing to numerical order.
or
왘Press the f or e button.
The stored entries are selected in in-
crements of 4 (e.g. Entry
M1
, Entry
M5
,
etc.).
Starting dialing process
왘Once you have selected a number,
press the
SND
key.
Repeat dialing
If, for example, the number dialed is busy,
you can again place calls to the last 10
telephone numbers dialed using the repeat
dialing function.
Manual repeat dialing (redial)
왘Press the
SND
key.
The last number dialed is shown in the
display.
왘Select the desired telephone number
using the d, c, f or e
button.
The abbreviation
L
and the number of
the entry are shown in the top line of
the display.
왘When you have selected a number,
press the
SND
key.
The call will then be placed.
Automatic repeat dialing (redial)
If a call cannot be connected, press the
SND
key.
REDIAL
will appear on the display and re-
peated attempts to place the call will be
made for the next 4 minutes.
Quick dialing
왘Enter the previously selected 3-digit
(1-999) number of the entry using the
number keys 1 to 0.
왘Press the
RCL
key.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed.
왘Press the
SND
key.
The call will be placed.
179
Controls in detail
Audio system
Speed dialing
왘Input the desired entry number using
the number keys 1 to 0.
A maximum of 2 digits can be entered.
If necessary, correct the last number
entered with the
CLR
key.
왘Press the
SND
key.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed. The number,
L
and the full entry number will be shown
in the display.
Express dialing
왘Press one of the desired number but-
tons 1 to 0 longer than one second.
The telephone number saved under
that number will be dialed.
Emergency call
왘Press button 1 longer than one second.
왘A call will be placed to the saved num-
ber (e.g. 911).
You can make an emergency call to an
emergency rescue station with a mobile
communications network.
The emergency call will be placed as long
as the corresponding mobile communica-
tions network is available. To do this,
switch the telephone on if not already done
so.
The call will also be placed if the un-
lock-code is not entered.
Emergency calls may not be possible with
all telephone networks or if certain net-
work services and/or telephone functions
are active. Check with your local network
operation company. It may take some time
to set up an emergency call.
To use this function you must ensure that
the number stored in memory location 1 is
the number to be dialed in case of emer-
gency.
If an emergency call cannot be connected,
the message
SYSTM BUSY
appears.
!
Please be aware that button 1 might al-
ready be reserved for an emergency
call number.
!
Please be aware that the 911 emergen-
cy call system is a public service. Using
it without due cause is a criminal of-
fense.
180
Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call
Accepting an incoming call in telephone
mode
With an incoming call, a ringing tone can
be heard and the caller’s telephone num-
ber, or the name under which this tele-
phone number has been saved in the
telephone book, appear on the display. If
the caller’s number is not transmitted,
CALL
will appear in the display.
왘Press the
SND
key to accept the call.
Accepting an incoming call in cassette,
CD or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the back-
ground (receiving symbol
S
visible on dis-
play), the audio source is muted when a
call is received. The ringing tone is heard
and the caller’s telephone number or the
name under which this telephone number
has been saved in the telephone book ap-
pear on the display. If the caller’s number
is not transmitted,
CALL
appears in the dis-
play.
왘Press the
SND
key to accept the call.
Muting a call
It is possible to silence a call, the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.
Muting
왘Press the
MUT
key.
Unmuting
왘Press the
MUT
key again.
Terminating a call
왘Press the
END
key.
왘The current call is disconnected.
181
Controls in detail
Audio system
Call waiting
If you receive another call during an al-
ready active call, you can accept the sec-
ond call and switch between the two.
Accepting a second call
왘Press the
SND
key.
You are connected with the second
caller, the first call is muted.
Switching between the calls
왘Press the
SND
key again.
Terminating the second call
왘Press the
END
key.
The current call will be terminated. You
are connected with the muted call
again.
182
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
switch for the front passenger side is on
the front passenger door.
1Left front window
2Right front window
왘Turn key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
Opening the windows
왘Press switch to resistance point.
The window will move downwards until
you release the switch.
Closing the windows
왘Pull on switch to resistance point.
The window will move upwards until
you release the switch.
Warning! G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be im-
mediately halted by releasing the switch, or,
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling the
switch and holding it there, or by pressing
and holding the button ‹ on the Smart-
Key, the automatic reversal function will not
operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from starter switch and lock your vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
183
Controls in detail
Power windows
If you pull and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward move-
ment of the window is blocked by some ob-
struction including but not limited to arms,
hands, fingers etc., the automatic reversal
will not operate.
Fully opening windows
왘Press switch past resistance point and
release.
The window opens completely.
Fully closing windows
왘Pull switch past resistance point and
release.
The window closes completely.
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
window will stop and open slightly.
Stopping windows
왘Press or pull respective switch again.
Opening and closing the windows with
the SmartKey
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof will also
be opened or closed when you operate the
power windows with the key.
왘Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.
Warning! G
Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds you again pull the
switch past the resistance point and re-
lease, the automatic reversal will not func-
tion.
i
You can also open or close the win-
dows using the:
앫SmartKey (summer opening/con-
venience feature), see below
앫button O in the control panel of
the climate control (컄page 143)
Warning! G
Never operate the windows or slid-
ing/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential dan-
ger, the procedure can be immediately halt-
ed by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
184
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘Press and hold button Œ after un-
locking the vehicle.
The windows and panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof begin to open after ap-
proximately one second.
왘Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
ing the vehicle.
The windows and panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof begin to close after
approximately one second.
왘Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
Ensure that all side windows and the pan-
orama sliding/pop-up roof are properly
closed before leaving the vehicle.
Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be resynchro-
nized each time after the battery has been
disconnected:
왘Pull the power window switches until
the side windows are closed and hold
the switches for approximately one
second.
185
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the sunshades for
the panorama sliding/pop-up roof
1To open sunshade
2To close sunshade
3To open sunshade
4To close sunshade
The sunshades only operate with panora-
ma sliding/pop-up roof closed.
Opening and closing the sunshades
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘To open or close the sunshades, move
the switch to resistance point in the re-
quired direction.
Release the switch when the sun-
shades have reached the required posi-
tion.
Opening the sunshades automatically
왘Move the switch past resistance point
in direction 1 and release.
Stopping the sunshades
왘Move the switch in any direction.
Warning! G
When closing the sunshades, make sure
that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
186
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof
1Push back to slide roof open
2Push forward to slide roof closed
3Push up to raise roof at rear
4Pull down to lower roof at rear
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof only op-
erates with the sunshades opened.
Opening and closing the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘To open, close, raise or lower the pan-
orama sliding/pop-up roof, move the
switch to resistance point in the re-
quired direction.
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the required position.
Opening the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof automatically
왘Move the switch past resistance point
in direction 1 and release.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof will
not open completely.
왘Press the switch again to open it com-
pletely.
Stopping the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof
왘Move the switch in any direction.
Warning! G
When closing the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof, make sure that there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the closing proce-
dure.
The closing procedure of the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof can be immediately re-
versed by either pressing or pulling the
switch, or pressing button Πon the key
and holding it.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from starter switch and lock your vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
187
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof with the SmartKey
The power windows will also be opened or
closed when you operate the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof with the key.
왘Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.
i
You can also open or close the panora-
ma sliding/pop-up roof using the:
앫SmartKey (summer opening/con-
venience feature), see below
앫button O in the control panel of
the climate control (컄page 143)
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof.
Open the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof only if the roof is clear of snow or
ice.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof can
be opened or closed manually should
an electrical malfunction occur
(컄page 278).
Warning! G
Never operate the windows or slid-
ing/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential dan-
ger, the procedure can be immediately halt-
ed by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
188
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘Press and hold button Œ after un-
locking the vehicle.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof tilts
and the windows begin to open after
approximately one second.
왘With the windows fully open, press and
hold button Πagain.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof be-
gins to slide open after approximately
one second.
왘Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
ing the vehicle.
The windows and panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof begin to close after
approximately one second.
왘Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
Ensure that all side windows and the pan-
orama sliding/pop-up roof are properly
closed before leaving the vehicle.
Synchronizing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof must be
resynchronized each time after the battery
has been disconnected, the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof has been closed manually
or the panorama sliding/pop-up roof does
not open smoothly or malfunctions
(컄page 279).
189
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is de-
scribed on the following pages:
앫Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed
The BAS, ABS and ESP driving systems are
described in the “Safety and Security” sec-
tion (컄page 73).
Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set any speed
over 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
Warning! G
Cruise control is a convenience system de-
signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
eration. The driver is and must remain at all
times responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, the traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
190
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1Set current or higher speed
2Set current or lower speed
3Cancel cruise control
4Resume at previously set speed
Saving current speed
왘Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
왘Step on the brake pedal.
or
왘Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
i
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
!
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear se-
lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
i
Vehicles with manual transmission:
The set cruise controlled speed is
switched off when declutching exceeds
four seconds during downshifting a
gear.
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
191
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting stored speed (“Resume”
function)
왘Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control will resume the last
previously set speed.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Setting a higher speed
왘Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the de-
sired speed is reached.
왘Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Setting a lower speed
왘Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
왘Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
Slower
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
Warning! G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
ous injury to you and others.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will au-
tomatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehi-
cle sufficiently.
192
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Roof rack*
Mount the roof rack only between the fas-
tening points 1 and in the recess of the
rubber strip 2.
Luggage cover
Removal
왘Take off securing straps 1.
왘Pull cover towards rear 2.
Installation
왘Place cover into holder.
왘Attach securing straps to trunk lid.
Split folding rear bench seat
The two sections can be folded down sep-
arately to enlarge the trunk.
Warning! G
Use only those roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manu-
facturer’s installation instructions. !
Do not place anything on the luggage
cover below the rear window.
Warning! G
When expanding the luggage compartment,
always fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-
rests must remain properly locked in the up-
right position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
193
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding the backrest forward
왘Pull release handle 1.
왘Fold seat cushion 2 forward.
왘Fully retract and fold down head re-
straints
왘Pull release lever 3 and fold backrest 4
forward.
Folding the backrest rearward
왘Fold the backrest rearward until it en-
gages.
If the backrest is not locked into position,
a red indicator 1 will be visible.
왘Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.
왘Fold the seat cushion rearward until it
locks into position.
Warning! G
If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
up, then the backrest is not properly locked
into position.
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the ex-
tended cargo compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
194
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle oc-
cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex-
ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
on the certification tag which can be found
on the left door pillar.
The handling characteristics of a fully load-
ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al-
ways be kept as low as possible since it in-
fluences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon-
sciousness and death.
195
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces Glove box
1Glove box
2Glove box lid release
Opening the glove box
왘Pull lid release 2.
The glove box lid opens downward.
Closing the glove box
왘Push lid up to close.
Locking the glove box
왘Insert mechanical key into the glove
box lock and turn it to position 4.
Unlocking the glove box
왘Turn mechanical key in the glove box
lock to position 3.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the luggage
cover below the rear window.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
i
Prior to closing the glove box, close the
compartment for glasses first.
196
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in front of arm-
rest
Opening
왘Slide cover 1 rearward.
The compartment contains a cigarette
lighter (컄page 199), a coin holder, and
a cup holder.
Closing
왘Slide cover 1 forward.
Cup holder Opening cup holder
왘Slide cover rearward.
왘Push button 1.
The cup holder opens automatically.
Warning! G
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
197
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing cup holder
왘Push in direction of arrow until cup
holder engages.
Armrest storage spaces
Opening compartment in armrest
왘Lift armrest 3 by handle 2.
Opening compartment under armrest
왘Lift armrest 3 by handle 1.
Closing
왘Lower armrest until it engages in lock.
Changing inclination of armrest
왘Pull up on armrest.
Lowering armrest
왘Pull handle 1 to lower armrest.
i
The storage compartment can be heat-
ed or cooled.
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compart-
ment, close the air vent (컄page 148)
while heating the passenger compart-
ment.
198
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Opening ashtray
왘Briefly touch cover plate 1.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
왘Secure vehicle from movement by set-
ting the parking brake. Move the selec-
tor lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
왘Slide ashtray insert in direction of
arrow 2 until it disengages.
왘Grip ashtray at indents (arrows 3) and
remove insert from ashtray frame.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘Install insert by pushing back into
frame until it engages again.
Warning! G
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob-
jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, they could be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants.
Warning! G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
cure vehicle from movement. Move gear se-
lector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.
199
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear seat ashtray
Opening ashtray
왘Pull at top of cover 2 to open ashtray.
Removing ashtray insert
왘Press latch 1 to disengage ashtray in-
sert and remove it.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘Install ashtray insert.
왘Close the ashtray.
Cigarette lighter
1Cigarette lighter
2Cover
왘Turn key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘Slide cover 2 rearward.
왘Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-
matically when hot.
Warning! G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
Hold the knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock your ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i
The cigarette lighter socket can be
used to accommodate electrical acces-
sories up to a maximum 85 W.
200
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
You can take and place telephone calls us-
ing the í and ì buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other tele-
phone functions, use the control system
(컄page 126).
See separate operating manual for instruc-
tions on how to use the telephone.
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
phone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Man-
agement and Data System)1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
1Observe all legal requirements.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (ap-
proximately 13.5 m) every second.
Warning! G
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
hicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an-
swering or placing a call.
201
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid* The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
mand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫automatic and manual emergency
앫roadside assistance and
앫information
The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cel-
lular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç.
왘To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depend-
ing on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your Ac-
quaintance Call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
tem may only be performed by com-
pleting the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning key
in starter switch to position 2 and the
message
TELE AID – NOT ACTIVATED
will be shown in the multifunction dis-
play for approx. 10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding ac-
tivation, please call the Response Cen-
ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
i
The SOS button is located above the in-
side rear view mirror.
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest cov-
er.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
lites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
202
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check
Initially, after turning the key in starter
switch to position 2, malfunctions are de-
tected and indicated (the indicator lamps
in the SOS button, the Roadside Assis-
tance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on). The mes-
sage
TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP!
ap-
pears for approx. 10 seconds in the
multifunction display.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatical-
ly:
앫following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or airbags deploy
앫if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm sys-
tem (컄page 78)and tow-away alarm
(컄page 79)
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled “SOS”, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the “SOS” button will be-
gin to flash. The message
EMERGENCY CALL
– CONNECTING CALL
appears in the multi-
function display. When the connection is
established, the message
EMERGENCY CALL
– CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multi-
Warning! G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button do not come on dur-
ing the system self-check or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
red and/or the message
TELE AID defec-
tive – VISIT WORKSHOP!
is displayed in
the multifunction display after the system
self-check, a malfunction in the system has
been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as ex-
pected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
203
Controls in detail
Useful features
function display. All information relevant to
the emergency, such as the location of the
vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite lo-
cation system), vehicle model, identifica-
tion number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon af-
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE
ap-
pears in the multifunction display. The Re-
sponse Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫it has been activated and is operation-
al. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
앫the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response cen-
ter
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the re-
sponse center.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il-
luminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network is not available).
The message
EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED
appears in the multifunction
display for approx. 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
204
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
1Cover
2SOS button
왘Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in the SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
왘Close cover 1 after the emergency call
is concluded.
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
ROADSIDE AS-
SISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL
will ap-
pear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multifunc-
tion display. The Tele Aid system will trans-
mit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and lo-
cation (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
Warning! G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
hicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
tion. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
pants.
205
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established the audio
system mutes and the message
TELE AID
– ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
왘Describe the nature of the need for as-
sistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance man-
ual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
앫Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func-
tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road-
side Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actu-
al vehicle data.
i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside As-
sistance button • remains illumi-
nated in red for approx. 10 seconds
during the system self-check after turn-
ing the key in the starter switch to
position 2 (together with the “SOS”
button and the Information
button ¡).
See system self-check (컄page 202)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center es-
tablished, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL FAILED
appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be ter-
minated using the ìbutton on the
multifunction steering wheel.
206
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Information button ¡.
왘Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
ter will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message
INFO – CONNECTING CALL
will
appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message
INFO – CALL CONNECTED
appears
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of cel-
lular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
lished. When a voice connection is estab-
lished the audio system mutes and the
message
TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display. Infor-
mation regarding the operation of your ve-
hicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or Mercedes-Benz USA products and ser-
vices is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
arately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approx. 10 seconds during the sys-
tem self-check after turning key in the
starter switch to position 2 (together
with the “SOS” button and the Road-
side Assistance button •).
See System self-check (컄page 202)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuous-
ly and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not avail-
able). The message
INFO –
CALL FAILED
appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
Information calls can be terminated us-
ing the ìbutton on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
207
Controls in detail
Useful features
Upgrade signals
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority.
앫Automatic emergency – First priority
앫Manual emergency – Second priority
앫Roadside assistance – Third priority
앫Information – Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (al-
ternating) tone will be heard, and the ap-
propriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identi-
fication number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to re-
transmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmis-
sion is completed. Once a call is conclud-
ed, a beep will be heard and the
appropriate indicator lamp will stop flash-
ing. The COMAND* system operation will
resume.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flash-
ing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently ac-
tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked or contact the Re-
sponse Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Cana-
da) as soon as possible.
!
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is conclud-
ed. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assis-
tance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button ì on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
208
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
tentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and the
reserve key is not handy:
왘Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your pass-
word which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk lid recessed handle for minimum
of 20 seconds until the “SOS” button is
flashing.
The message
EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multi-
function display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the audio system or the COMAND* sys-
tem audio is muted and the selected
mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
optional cellular phone (if installed)
switches off. If you must use this
phone, the vehicle must be parked. Dis-
connect the coiled cord and place the
call. The COMAND* navigation system
(if engaged) will continue to run. The
display in the instrument cluster is
available for use and spoken com-
mands are only available by pressing
the RPT button on the COMAND* unit.
A pop-up window will appear in the CO-
MAND* display to indicate that a
Tele Aid call is in progress.
i
The remote door unlock feature is avail-
able if the relevant cellular phone net-
work is available.
The “SOS” button will flash and the
message
EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED
will appear in the mul-
tifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re-
sponse Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the ve-
hicle occupants.
If the trunk lid recessed handle was
pulled for more than 20 seconds be-
fore door unlock authorization was re-
ceived by the Response Center, you
must wait 15 minutes before pulling
the trunk lid recessed handle again.
209
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered inci-
dent report.
왘Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is lo-
cated, the Response Center will con-
tact the local law enforcement and you.
The vehicle’s location will only be pro-
vided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
objects.
1Indicator lamp
2, 3, 4 Signal transmitter key
5Hand-held remote control trans-
mitter
Warning! G
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down.
When programming or operating the remote
control make sure there is no possibility of
anyone being injured by the moving door.
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience diffi-
culties with programming the transmit-
ter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
210
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the in-
tegrated remote control
왘Turn key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘Hold the end of the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to
12 cm) away from the surface of the in-
tegrated remote control located on the
inside rear view mirror, keeping the in-
dicator lamp in view.
왘Using both hands, simultaneously push
the hand-held transmitter button and
the desired integrated remote control
button. Do not release the buttons until
completing next step.
왘The indicator lamp on the integrated
remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly. The rapid flashing
lamp indicates successful program-
ming of the new frequency signal.
왘When the indicator lamp flashes rapid-
ly, release both buttons.
왘To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the above steps.
i
For operation in the USA only: This de-
vice complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
앫This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
앫this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
If, after several attempts, you do not
successfully program the integrated re-
mote control device to learn the signal
of the hand-held transmitter, the ga-
rage door opener could be equipped
with the “rolling code feature”.
211
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other roll-
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea-
ture, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion of
this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and
easier.)
왘Locate training button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the trans-
mitting button, refer to garage door
opener operator’s manual.
왘Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds time to initiate the
following step.
왘Firmly press and release the pro-
grammed integrated remote control
transmit button.
왘Press and release same button a sec-
ond time to complete the training pro-
cess.
Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
왘Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed button on
the integrated remote control transmit-
ter.
Canadian programming
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop trans-
mitting.
왘Continue to press and hold the inte-
grated remote control transmitter but-
ton (refer to steps two through four in
the “Programming” portion) while you
press and re-press (“cycle”) your
hand-held transmitter every two sec-
onds until the frequency signal has
been learned.
Upon successful training, the indicator
lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly
after several seconds.
212
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operating the remote control
왘Turn key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
왘Select and press the appropriate but-
ton to activate the remote controlled
device.
The integrated remote control trans-
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the remote control memory
왘Turn key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
왘Simultaneously hold down the left and
right side buttons for approximately
20 seconds, or until the indicator lamp
blinks rapidly.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
Pre-production photograph 왘
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
213
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
214
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
In the “Operation” section you will find de-
tailed information on operating, maintain-
ing and caring for your vehicle.
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satis-
fied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive en-
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of max-
imum rpm in each gear).
앫Changes gears in a timely manner.
앫Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the selector lever.
앫Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
All of the above instuctions also apply
when driving the first 1000 miles
(1500 km) after the engine or the rear dif-
ferential has been replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
215
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-
pends on driving habits and operating con-
ditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫Keep tires at the recommended infla-
tion pressures
앫Remove unnecessary loads
앫Remove roof rack when not in use
앫Allow engine to warm up under low
load use
앫Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
eration
앫Have all maintenance work performed
at regular intervals by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
Drinking and driving Pedals
Warning! G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combina-
tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
cident is sharply increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking
drugs.
Warning! G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
216
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Brakes
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only sub-
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
ter stays on, the brake fluid level in the res-
ervoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
ervoir.
Have the brake system inspected at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
ately.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Install only brake pads and brake fluid rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning! G
When the engine is not running, the brake
and steering systems are without power as-
sistance. Under these circumstances, a
much greater effort is necessary to stop or
steer the vehicle
Warning! G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through wa-
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
!
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄page 74).
217
Operation
Driving instructions
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream will cool
down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the oper-
ating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow one wheel to spin for an extend-
ed period with the ESP switched off. Doing
so may cause serious damage to the drive
train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Parking
Warning! G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps pre-
vent overheating of the brakes and re-
duces brake pad wear
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
duces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
!
Set the parking brake whenever park-
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move selector lever to position P (man-
ual transmission: first or reverse gear).
In addition, when parking on hills, turn
front wheel towards the curb
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
218
Operation
Driving instructions
Tires Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
mately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫Move the selector lever to position P
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).
앫Slowly release brake pedal.
앫When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel against curb.
앫Turn the key to starter switch
position 0.
앫Take the key and lock vehicle when leav-
ing.
Warning! G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re-
pairs.
Warning! G
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
As tread depth approaches 1/16 in
(1.5 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet
road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
219
Operation
Driving instructions
Specified tire pressures must be main-
tained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires for the winter season for all
four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow,
they can reduce your stopping distance as
compared to summer tires. Stopping dis-
tance, however, is still considerably great-
er than when the road is not covered with
snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
ing conditions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130
mph (210 km/h)
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning! G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Warning! G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
220
Operation
Driving instructions
Information on tire speed rating for winter
tires (컄page 236).
Vehicles without Evolution Package
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h) or optional
“V”-rated tires which have a speed rating
of 150 mph (240 km/h) or optional
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h).
Vehicles with Evolution Package
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move selector lever to position N or in
case of manual transmission declutch. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
rective steering action.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
We therefore recommend depressing the
brake pedal periodically when traveling at
length on salt-strewn roads.
This can bring road salt impaired braking
efficiency back to normal. Be very careful
that you carry out these braking maneu-
vers without endangering any other road
users.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt treated roads, the braking efficien-
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
ter driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.
i
Information on driving with snow
chains (컄page 237).
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
221
Operation
Driving instructions
For more information on winter driving
(컄page 236).
Standing water Passenger compartment
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is a widely-spread
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
terior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
hicle not facing the wind
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth.
If you must drive through standing wa-
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
age is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob-
jects.
222
Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio trans-
mitter
COMAND*, radio and telephone*
Telephones and two-way radios
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
structions regarding use of an external an-
tenna.
Catalytic converter
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our rec-
ommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
agement and Data System), radio or tele-
phone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec-
ond.
1Observe all legal requirements
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury. !
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
verters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
223
Operation
Driving instructions
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
justments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
cians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing re-
quirements. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to approx. 248°F
(120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
gine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open at all times.
Warning! G
앫Driving when your engine is badly over-
heated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine com-
partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
riously burned.
앫Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near
the vehicle until it cools down.
224
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
왘Remove the key from the starter
switch.
왘Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
왘Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.
왘Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
왘Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
왘Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tight-
ened.
왘Close the fuel filler flap.
Warning! G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Warning! G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
sure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
zle, which could cause personal injury.
225
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip
1Coolant level
More information on the coolant level
can be found in the “Operation” section
(컄page 229).
2Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)
More information on brake fluid can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 317).
Removing fuse box cover see page
(컄page 303).
3Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
For more information on refilling the
reservoir, see the “Operation” section
(컄page 232).
Engine oil level
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Operation” section
(컄page 227).
Opening hood see (컄page 226).
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (pota-
ble water quality). More information on
coolant can be found in the“Operation”
section (컄page 229).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
the “Practical hints” section (컄page 280).
Exterior lamp switch (컄page 96).
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflation pressure
can be found in the “Operation” section
(컄page 234).
i
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ? lamp to
illuminate.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 250).
226
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
Opening
1Hood release
왘Pull lever 1 downwards.
The hood is unlocked. At the same time
a handle will extend out of the radiator
grill.
2Handle for opening the hood
왘Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
grill
왘Open the hood (do not pull up on the
handle) and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning! G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Warning! G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
227
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing
왘Let the hood drop from a height of ap-
proximately 1ft (30cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
왘Check to make sure that the hood is
fully closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫the vehicle is new
앫the vehicle is driven frequently at high-
er engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
앫be parked on level ground
앫be at normal operating temperature
앫have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
Warning! G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning! G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫with the engine running
앫while starting the engine
앫if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
Warning! G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
228
Operation
Engine compartment
You can check the engine oil level on the
multifunction display.
왘Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 2.
The standard display showing the trip
odometer and the main odometer
(컄page 105) should appear in the multi-
function display.
왘Press button k or j, on the
steering wheel until the following mes-
sage is seen in the multifunction dis-
play:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - MEASUREMENT IN
PROCESS!
CORRECT MEASUREMENT ONLY
IF VEH. LEVEL
After about three seconds this mes-
sage is displayed:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL-MEASURING NOW
One of the following messages will sub-
sequently appear in the indicator:
앫
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - O.K.
앫
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - ADD 1 QUART
(1.o LITER)!
앫
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - ADD 1.5
QUARTS (1.5 LITERS)!
앫
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - ADD 2.0
QUARTS (2.0 LITERS)!
Adding engine oil
1Filler neck
왘Unscrew the cap from filler neck 1. Be
careful not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
!
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. 컄컄
229
Operation
Engine compartment
왘Screw the cap back on the filler neck.
Other display messages
If there is excessive engine oil with the en-
gine at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - REDUCE OIL LEVEL
왘Have excess oil siphoned.
If the key is not turned to position 2 in the
starter switch:
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL IGNITION ON
PLEASE!
왘Switch on the ignition.
If you see the message:
OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD
왘Wait five minutes before repeating
check procedure.
If you see the message:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - NOT WHEN ENGINE ON!
왘Turn off the engine. If engine is at nor-
mal operating temperature, wait five
minutes before checking oil. If the en-
gine is not yet at normal operating tem-
perature, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.
If a proper oil level check cannot be per-
formed, the following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - MASURING NOT POS-
SIBLE
왘Repeat the engine oil level check after
a short while.
See “Practical hints” (컄page 262) if an en-
gine oil level indicator appears on the dis-
play when the engine is running.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 317).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compart-
ment.
230
Operation
Engine compartment
1Coolant expansion tank
왘Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
imately one half turn to the left to re-
lease any excess pressure.
왘Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫for cold coolant: reaches the black
top part of the reservoir
앫for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
왘Add coolant as required.
왘Replace and tighten cap.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” (컄page 321)
Warning! G
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
앫Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194×F (90×C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
앫Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
imately ½ turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
앫Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.
231
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the en-
gine compartment on the right hand side.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-
vice life.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short dis-
tance trips, you will need to have the bat-
tery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
GObserve all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
ARisk of explosion.
DKeep flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
BBattery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
EWear eye protection.
CKeep children away.
FFollow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
232
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of
앫Vehicles without headlamp cleaning
system: approx. 3.2 US qt. (3 l).
앫Vehicles with headlamp cleaning sys-
tem: approx. 6.4 US qt. (6 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
왘Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed wind-
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
pending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the washer system/reser-
voir.
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” (컄page 324).
1Washer fluid reservoir
Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
mable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be-
cause it may ignite. You could be seriously
burned. !
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer flu-
id can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
233
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter for information on tested and recom-
mended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation. They can also offer ad-
vice concerning tire service and purchase
Retread tires are not tested or recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
cle when such tires are used.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter for information on tested and recom-
mended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation.
Important guidelines
앫Use only sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage.
앫If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.
앫Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8in (3 mm).
앫When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Warning! G
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫The wheel brakes or suspension compo-
nents can be damaged
앫The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guar-
anteed
Warning! G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
234
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫Driving style
앫Tire pressure
앫Distance driven
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advantag-
es, such as better aquaplaning perfor-
mance. To benefit, however, you must
ensure that the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in-
tended direction of tire rotation.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at inter-
vals of no more than 14 days.
If the tires are warm you should only cor-
rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur-
rent operating conditions.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec-
ified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
Warning! G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Warning! G
If the tire pressure repeatedly drops
앫check the tires for punctures from for-
eign objects
앫check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim
i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.
235
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
increased while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
Check the spare tire periodically for condi-
tion and inflation. Spare tires will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
Rotating wheels
On vehicles with the same wheel size all
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
sooner if necessary, according to the de-
gree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and en-
sure proper tire inflation pressure.
Warning! G
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
cause they are more likely to become punc-
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Warning! G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
236
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter have your vehi-
cle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service in-
cludes:
앫Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for below freezing temperatures
(컄page 324).
앫Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started, even at
low ambient temperatures.
앫Tire change. We recommend M+S rat-
ed radial-ply tires on all four wheels for
the winter season.
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 39°F (4°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef-
fectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter
operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
tices are available from your tire dealer or
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Warning! G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 0.16 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
er suitable for winter operation.
237
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heat-
er.
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex-
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫Chains should only be used on the rear
wheels. Follow the manufacturer's
mounting instructions.
앫Use only snow chains that are ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
Warning! G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄page 75) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the vehi-
cle‘s traction. !
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with tire sizes 225/50 R16 and with
tire sizes 225/45 R17.
238
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS (Flexible Service System).
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, one of the following mes-
sages will appear in the multifunction dis-
play while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
SERVICE A - IN xx DAYS
SERVICE A - IN xx MILES (KM)
SERVICE A - DUE NOW
The type of service due is indicated in the
multifunction display field:
9Minor service (A)
´Major service (B)
Clearing the service indicator
The service indicator is automatically
cleared
앫after 10 seconds when you switch on
the ignition or when reaching the ser-
vice threshold while driving.
앫after 30 seconds, once the suggested
service term had passed.
You can also clear it yourself by pressing
the reset knob on the instrument cluster
(컄page 22).
Service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested ser-
vice term a signal sounds every time when
you switch on the ignition and you will see
the following message in the multifunction
display:
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY xx MILES (KM)
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
239
Operation
Maintenance
The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
service indicator following a completed
service.
Calling up the service indicator
왘Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control sys-
tem appears (컄page 105).
왘Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel until the FSS
indicator appears in the multifunction
display.
Resetting the service indicator
In the event that the service on your vehi-
cle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
service indicator yourself.
왘Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control sys-
tem appears (컄page 105).
왘Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel until the FSS
indicator appears in the display.
왘Press the reset knob for about four
seconds.
This message appears in the display:
DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTER-
VAL? CONFIRM BY PRESSING RESET (R)
BUTTON
왘To confirm, hold down the reset knob
for about four seconds.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.
i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indica-
tor. To arrive at the true service dead-
line, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the ser-
vice indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
i
If the service indicator was inadvertent-
ly reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center
correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing the proper service
as called for by the FSS will cause the
FSS to incorrectly determine the next
service interval which will result in en-
gine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
240
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external in-
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at-
tack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by ex-
treme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫Air pollution
앫Road salt
앫Tar, gravel and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
diately remove:
앫Grease and oil
앫Fuel
앫Coolant
앫Brake fluid
앫Insects
앫Tree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi-
nates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫Near the ocean
앫In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫During winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de-
signed for cleaning your vehicle.
241
Operation
Vehicle care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod-
ucts.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet ’Vehicle Care Guide’.
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning
the vehicle always observe manufacturer’s
operating instructions.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every 3 to 5 months, depending on climate
and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
cle doors etc.).
!
Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
tors, seals, or other rubber parts.
242
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment
make sure to protect electrical compo-
nents and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
rosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bush-
ings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro-
tected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap-
proved Car Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in out-
side mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not for-
get to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
er.
Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal
lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
243
Operation
Vehicle care
Wiper blades
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean
cloth and detergent solution.
Window cleaning
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass
surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Light alloy wheels
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow instructions on container.
Instrument cluster
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
and remove key from starter switch be-
fore cleaning the wiper blades, other-
wise the wiper motor can suddenly turn
on and cause injury.
i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
and remove key from starter switch be-
fore cleaning the windshield, otherwise
the wiper motor can suddenly turn on
and cause injury.
i
Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid could lead to corrosion.
244
Operation
Vehicle care
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Headliner
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Leather upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
colored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
MB Tex upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lintfree cloth and apply with
light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Warning! G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
245
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
246
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
light up during the bulb self-check when
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2, have it checked and replaced
if necessary.
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
vThe yellow ESP warning lamp
lights up while driving.
The ESP is deactivated. Risk of accident!
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions.
왘Turn the ESP back on (컄page 75).
If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possi-
ble.
vThe yellow ESP warning lamp
flashes while driving.
The ESP or traction control has come into op-
eration because of detected traction loss in
at least one tire.
왘When driving off apply as little throttle
as possible.
왘While driving ease up on the accelera-
tor.
왘Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘Do not deactivate the ESP. Excep-
tions: (컄page 76).
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.
247
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
-The yellow ABS malfunction indi-
cator lamp comes on while driv-
ing.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also
switched off (see messages in display).
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the ABS available.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accidents.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
왘When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
왘If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
248
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
1The red SRS indicator lamp lights
up while driving.
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys-
tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
왘Drive with added caution to the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could result in an acci-
dent and/or injury to you or to others.
249
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
3(Canada only)
;(USA only)
The red brake warning lamp
lights up while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘Release the parking brake
(컄page 46).
The red brake warning lamp
lights up while driving.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-
voir.
왘Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
Warning! G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake sys-
tem. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
250
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
?The yellow “CHECK ENGINE”
malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
There is a malfunction in:
앫The fuel management system
앫The ignition system
앫The emission control system
앫Systems which impact emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
왘Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
tion of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the park-
ing brake pedal.
The fuel cap is not closed tight. 왘Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty. 왘After refuelling start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
<The red seat belt warning lamp
blinks for a brief period after
starting the engine.
The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
belts.
왘Fasten your seat belt.
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp
lights up while driving.
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
왘Refuel at the next gas station
(컄page 224).
251
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
7The indicator lamp lights up. A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat. Therefore the front
passenger airbag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
왘Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
7The indicator lamp does not light
up with a BabySmartTM child
seat properly installed on the
front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Make sure that there is nothing be-
tween seat cushion and child seat and
check installation of the child seat.
왘If the light remains out, have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been
repaired.
252
Practical hints
What to do if …
Messages in the display
The control system shows warning and
malfunction messages in the multifunction
display.
Certain warning and malfunction messag-
es are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in
the control system (컄page 112) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the mul-
tifunction display with a red background.
Cetrain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset knob (컄page 22).
Other messages of high priority and mes-
sages of less immediate priority (regular
display colors) can be cleared from the
multifunction display using the reset knob
and are then stored in the malfunction
message memory (컄page 112).
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of all the messages that may
appear in the display.
Warning! G
All categories of messages contain impor-
tant information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad-
dressed as soon as possible at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
age or personal injury.
Warning! G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Turning the key in starter switch to
position 2 causes all lamps as well as
the multifunction display to come on.
Ensure that they are all in working or-
der before starting your journey.
253
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
-
ABS SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ABS has detected a malfunction and
has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are
also deactivated. The brake system is still
functioning normally but without the ABS
available.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘Have the system checked at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning. 왘Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘Have the system checked at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
254
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
BAS BRAKE ASSIST
NOT AVAILABLE!
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the BAS has switched off.
왘When the voltage is above this value
again, the BAS is operational again.
왘If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
BRAKE ASSIST
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The BAS has detected a malfunction and
switched off. The brake system is still func-
tioning normally but without the BAS avail-
able.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Have the system checked at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning. 왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Have the system checked at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
255
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
#
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The battery was charged with a battery
charger or jump started.
왘Have the battery checked at a ser-
vice station.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
앫alternator malfunctioning
앫broken poly-V-belt
왘Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
왘Drive immediately to the nearest au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
256
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
3 (Canada only)
; (USA only)
BRAKE WEAR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
왘Have the brake pads replaced as
soon as possible.
BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
왘Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
Warning! G
Driving with this message displayed can re-
sult in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately. Don’t add brake fluid
before checking the brake system. Overfill-
ing the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be se-
riously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the service book-
let.
257
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
B
COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL
The coolant level is too low. 왘Add coolant (컄page 229).
왘If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat, causing major en-
gine damage.
258
Practical hints
What to do if …
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 120°C.
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
Ï
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
The coolant is too hot. 왘Stop the vehicle and turn off the en-
gine.
왘Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could oth-
erwise damage the engine.
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
259
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
Ï
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
왘Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing
so could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
COOLANT
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Observe the coolant temperature
gauge.
왘Have the fan replaced as soon as
possible.
260
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
J
DOOR OPEN!
You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.
왘Close the doors.
ESP
ESP
NOT AVAILABLE!
The ESP is deactivated because of a mal-
function or interrupted power supply. The
ABS might not be operational.
왘With vehicle stationary and the en-
gine running, turn the steering wheel
completely to the left and then to the
right to synchronize the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
The self-diagnosis has not been complet-
ed.
The display will clear itself after driving a
short distance at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
261
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
ESP
ESP
NOT AVAILABLE!
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ESP has switched off.
왘When the voltage is above this value
again, the ESP is operational again.
왘If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
ESP
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ESP is deactivated because of a mal-
function.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ESP or the ESP display is malfunction-
ing.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accident.
262
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
There is no oil in the engine. There is a dan-
ger of engine damage.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as possible.
왘Turn off the engine.
왘Add engine oil.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK LEVEL!
The engine oil level is too low. 왘Check the engine oil level
(컄page 227) and add oil as required.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL!
You have added too much engine oil. There
is a risk of damaging the engine or the cat-
alytic converter.
왘Have oil siphoned. Observe all legal
requirements with respect to its dis-
posal.
ENGINE OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The engine oil has dropped to a critical lev-
el.
왘Check the engine oil level
(컄page 227) and add oil as required.
왘If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
There is water in the oil. 왘Have the oil checked.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
263
Practical hints
What to do if …
When the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK
LEVEL!” message appears while the engine
is running and at operating temperature,
the engine oil level is low.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest gas station where the en-
gine oil should be filled up with an ap-
proved oil (컄page 227).
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in se-
rious engine damage that is not cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
A
RESERVE FUEL
VISIT FILLING STATION!
The fuel level has dropped below the re-
serve mark.
왘Refuel at the next gas station
(컄page 224).
Y
HOOD OPEN!
You are driving with the hood open. 왘Close the hood (컄page 226).
I
REPLACE KEY
VISIT WORKSHOP!
No additional code available for SmartKey. 왘Change the batteries (컄page 294).
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY!
You have forgotten to remove the key. 왘Remove the key from the starter
switch.
.
LAMP SENSOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
왘Set lamp operation to manual.
왘Switch on headlamps using the exte-
rior lamp switch.
264
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
.
LOW BEAM, L
CHECK LAMP!
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
LOW BEAM, R
CHECK LAMP!
The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The display for the lamps or the system is
malfunctioning.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
TURN SIGNAL, LR
CHECK LAMP!
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIGNAL, RR
CHECK LAMP!
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIG. IN MIRROR, L
CHECK LAMP!
The left turn signal in the side mirror is mal-
functioning. This message will only appear
if all light emitting diodes have stopped
working.
왘Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.
TURN SIG. IN MIRROR, R
CHECK LAMP!
The right turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only ap-
pear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
왘Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.
265
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
.
TURN SIGNAL, LF
CHECK LAMP!
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIGNAL RF
CHECK LAMP!
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
BRAKE LAMP
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp
is permanently on.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
BRAKE LAMP L
CHECK LAMP!
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
BRAKE LAMP R
CHECK LAMP!
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
3RD BRAKE LAMP
CHECK LAMP!
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
HIGH BEAM, L
CHECK LAMP!
The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
HIGH BEAM, R
CHECK LAMP!
The right high beam lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
266
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP L
CHECK LAMP!
The left license plate lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP R
CHECK LAMP!
The right license plate lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLAMP, L
CHECK LAMP!
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLAMP, R
CHECK LAMP!
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
REAR FOGLAMP
CHECK LAMP!
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
REVERSE LAMP L
CHECK LAMP!
The left backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
REVERSE LAMP R
CHECK LAMP!
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TAIL LAMP, L
CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A back-
up bulb is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
267
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
.
TAIL LAMP, R
CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
SIDE MARKER LAMP, LF
CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
The left side marker lamp is malfunction-
ing. A backup bulb is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
SIDE MARKER LAMP, RF
CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
The right side marker lamp is malfunction-
ing. A backup bulb is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
LIGHTS
TURN OFF LAMPS!
This display appears if the driver’s door is
opened with the engine shut off and no
key in the starter switch.
왘Insert key in the starter switch.
왘Switch off lights.
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY!
Key in the starter switch position 1 or 2.왘Remove key from the starter switch.
!(Canada only)
; (USA only)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE!
You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘Release the parking brake
(컄page 46).
<
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
268
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
<
FRT. PASSENGER SEAT
LOOK!
The display reminds you and your passen-
ger to fasten the seat belt.
왘Fasten the seat belts.
DRIVER’S SEAT BELT
FASTEN SEAT BELT!
The display reminds you to fasten the seat
belt.
왘Fasten the seat belts.
_
STEERING WHEEL ADJUST
LOCK!
The steering column is not properly locked. 왘Lock the steering column properly
(컄page 38).
POWER STEERING FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The power steering gear oil level is too low.
There is a danger of steering gear damage.
왘Have the system checked by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is
too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
269
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
L
TELE AID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
One or more main functions of the Tele Aid
system are malfunctioning.
왘Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
ì
FUNCTION
NOT AVAILABLE
This display appears if button ì or
í on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Ê
TRUNK OPEN!
This message will appear whenever the
trunk lid is open.
왘Close the trunk lid.
1
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Drive with added caution to the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
270
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
#
UNDERVOLTAGE
ENGINE ON!
The battery has insufficient voltage and
can no longer supply the convenience
functions such as seat heater*.
Start the engine (컄page 44).
UNDERVOLTAGE
SWITCH CONSUMERS OFF!
The battery is malfunctioning. 왘Have the battery checked at a ser-
vice station.
G
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
The instrument cluster display is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
±
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
앫Coolant temperature gauge
앫Tachometer
앫Cruise control display
왘Have the electronic systems checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center (컄page 250).
W
WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL!
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of
total reservoir capacity.
왘Add washer fluid (컄page 232).
271
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is stored in the trunk be-
hind the left trim panel.
왘Turn handles 2.
왘Remove the trim panel 1.
왘Loosen the securing strap 2.
왘Remove first aid kit 1.
Spare wheel
The spare wheel is located under the trunk
floor.
왘Lift trunk floor and engage handle in
the upper edge of the trunk.
1Spare wheel
2Storage tray with vehicle tool kit.
3Mounting screw for spare wheel/cover
for vehicle tools
Removing the spare wheel
왘Turn the mounting screw 3 counter-
clockwise.
왘Remove the spare wheel 1.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
272
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Storing the spare wheel
왘Place spare wheel 1 in wheel well.
왘Turn mounting screw 3 clockwise to its
stop to secure the spare wheel.
왘Lower the trunk floor before closing the
trunk lid.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit and air pump are stored
in the wheel well below the trunk floor.
1Vehicle jack
2Air pump
3Alignment bolt
4Wheel wrench
5Towing eye bolt
6Spare wheel bolts
Vehicle jack
왘Remove the vehicle jack from the spare
wheel well under the trunk floor.
왘Push the crank handle up.
왘Turn the crank handle clockwise until it
engages (operational position).
Before storing the vehicle jack in its com-
partment:
앫It should be fully collapsed.
앫The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
273
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Spare wheel bolts
1Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2Wheel bolt for light alloy spare wheel
rim size 4 1/2B x15 H2
Refer to “Technical data” section
(컄page 313) for model and spare wheel
rim size information.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up brack-
et. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jack stands before working under
the vehicle.
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting spare wheel rim
size 4 1/2Bx15 H2 (컄page 313).
The use of any wheel bolts other than
wheel bolts 2 for spare wheel rim
size 4 1/2B x15 H2 can cause physical
damage to the vehicle.
Warning! G
Be sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel af-
ter it has been repaired.
274
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the driver’s door
If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
door using the SmartKey, open the door
using the mechanical key.
1Mechanical key locking tab
2Mechanical key
왘Move locking tab 1 in direction of ar-
row and slide the mechanical key out of
the housing.
3Unlocking
4Locking
왘Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the me-
chanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
앫Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫Insert the key in the starter switch.
275
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk lid
If you are unable to unlock the trunk lid
with the SmartKey, you can use the emer-
gency release on the inside of the trunk lid
to unlock it.
1Cover
2Release lever
3Rear bench seat backrest
왘Fold backrest 3 forward.
왘Remove cover 1 from the trim on the
trunk lid.
왘Push release lever 2 all the way to the
right.
왘Open the trunk lid.
Locking the vehicle
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
key as follows:
왘Close the passenger door and the trunk
lid.
왘Press the central locking switch in the
cockpit (컄page 87).
왘Check to see whether the locking knob
on the passenger door is still visible. If
necessary push it down manually.
왘Lock the driver’s door with the me-
chanical key.
i
The trunk lid swings open upwards. Al-
ways make sure that there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
276
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Changing batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey card are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
SmartKey
1Mechanical key
2Battery compartment
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘Remove mechanical key (컄page 274).
왘Insert the mechanical key in side open-
ing and push gray slide.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘Pull the battery compartment out of the
key housing in direction of arrow.
3Battery
4Contact spring
왘Remove the batteries.
왘Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-
teries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
왘Return battery compartment into hous-
ing until it locks in place.
Warning! G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
i
When changing batteries, always re-
place both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
277
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Fuel filler flap
왘Open the trunk lid.
왘Fold right-side tail lamp trim aside
왘Reach inside through opening.
왘Turn release knob 1 clockwise (arrow).
The fuel filler flap can now be opened.
Manually unlocking the transmission
selector lever
In the case of power failure the transmis-
sion selector lever can be manually un-
locked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
왘Open the storage compartment in front
of the center armrest.
왘Release coin holder 1 (e.g. using a
small coin).
왘Swing coin holder 1 aside.
왘Insert a tool 2 (e.g. screwdriver) into
the opening.
왘Perform the following two steps simul-
taneously:
왘Push the tool down.
왘Move selector lever from
position P.
왘Reinstall the coin holder after removing
the tool from the opening.
i
The selector lever is locked again when
moving it to position P.
278
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof drive is
located behind the lens of the interior over-
head light.
You can open or close the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof manually should an elec-
trical malfunction occur.
왘Pry off lens 1 using a screwdriver.
왘Slide both locking tabs 2 in direction of
arrow.
왘Lower rear of cover and remove.
왘Remove cover.
왘Obtain crank 3.
왘Insert crank 3 through left hand side
motor hole 4.
왘Turn crank 3 clockwise to:
앫slide roof closed
앫raise roof at the rear
왘Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
앫slide roof open
앫lower roof at the rear
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof must be
resynchronized after being operated man-
ually.
i
Do not disconnect electrical connec-
tors.
279
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Synchronizing the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof
왘Switch on the ignition.
왘Move the switch in the “close” direc-
tion and wait until the sunshades are
fully closed.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
왘Move the switch in the “open” direction
and wait until the sunshades are fully
opened.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
왘Move the switch in the “open” direction
and wait until the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof is approximately 4 in
(10cm) opened.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
왘Move the switch in the “close” direc-
tion and wait until the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof is fully closed.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof is syn-
chronized when the panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof opens automatically.
280
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
Bulbs Front lamps
i
Backup bulbs will be brought into use
when the following lamps malfunction:
앫Rear fog lamp
앫Tail lamps
앫Standing lamps
Lamp Type
1Additional turn sig-
nal lamps
LED
2Turn signal lamp
Halogen headlamp
Turn signal lamp
Bi-Xenon* headlamp
1156A
2357A
3Low beam Halogen
Low and hi beam*
H7 (55W)
Bi-Xenon*
4High beam H7 (55 W)
Parking and stand-
ing lamp
W 5 W
5Fog lamp HB4/9006
(55 W)
6Side marker lamp W 5 W
281
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement 앫Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow-
ing lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Additional turn signals in the exteri-
or rear view mirrors
앫High mounted brake lamp
앫Xenon lamps
앫Front fog lamps
Lamp Type
7High mounted brake
lamp
LED
8License plate lamps C5W
9Brake lamp P 21 W (21W)
Turn signal lamp PY21W (21W)
Tail, parking stand-
ing and side marker
lamp
W5W (5W)
Rear fog lamp, driv-
er’s side
P21W (21W)
Warning! G
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al-
low the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you
앫touch or move it when hot
앫drop the bulb
앫scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
282
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Halogen headlamps
1Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2Headlamp cover for high beam head-
lamp and for parking and standing
lamp
3Headlamp cover for low beam head-
lamp
4Low beam bulb
5High beam bulb
6Parking and standing lamp
Low and high beam bulb
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the hood (컄page 226).
왘Turn headlamp cover 2 or 3 to the left
and remove.
왘Turn bulb holder with bulb to the left
and pull out.
왘Pull out the bulb from the base (do not
pull on glass tube).
왘Insert new bulb so that the base fits in
the bulb holder recess and is level.
왘Place the bulb holder with bulb on the
headlamp mounting and turn the bulb
holder to the right until it engages.
왘Replace headlamp cover 2 or 3 and
turn to the right until it engages.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the hood (컄page 226).
왘Turn bulb socket 1 to the left and pull
out.
왘Push bulb into socket, turn to the left
and remove.
왘Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn to the right.
왘Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and turn
to the right.
283
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the hood (컄page 226).
왘Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and
remove.
왘Pull out the bulb socket with the bulb.
왘Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘Insert a new bulb in the socket.
왘Reinstall the bulb socket.
왘Replace headlamp cover 2 and turn to
the right until it engages.
Bi-Xenon* headlamps
1Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2Headlamp cover for high beam head-
lamp
3Headlamp cover for Bi-Xenon head-
lamp
4High beam bulb
5Bulb holder
6Parking and standing lamp
High beam bulb
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the hood (컄page 226).
왘Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and
remove.
i
If the inside of the headlamps is fogged
up, switch the lights on for a sufficient
amount of time.
Warning! G
Do not remove the cover 3 for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Bi-Xe-
non lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician.
컄컄
284
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘Turn bulb holder 5 with bulb to the left
and pull out.
왘Pull out bulb from the base (do not pull
on glass tube).
왘Insert new bulb so that the base fits in
the bulb holder recess and is level.
왘Place the bulb holder with bulb on the
headlamp mounting and turn bulb hold-
er to the right until it engages.
왘Replace headlamp cover 2 and turn to
the right until it engages.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the hood (컄page 226).
왘Turn bulb socket 1 to the left and pull
out.
왘Push bulb into socket, turn to the left
and remove.
왘Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn to the right.
왘Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and turn
to the right.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the hood (컄page 226).
왘Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and
remove.
왘Pull out the bulb socket 6 with the
bulb.
왘Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘Insert a new bulb in the socket.
왘Reinstall the bulb socket.
왘Replace headlamp cover 2 and turn to
the right until it engages.
285
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Carefully slide lamp towards rear.
왘Remove front end first.
왘Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘Insert new bulb in socket.
왘Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
왘To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
place.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Open the trunk lid (컄page 85).
왘Turn handles 2.
왘Remove the trim panel 1.
왘Press together the latches 1.
왘Remove bulb holder.
왘Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
왘Insert new bulb and reinstall bulb sock-
et.
왘Reinstall trim panel.
286
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
1Stop lamp
2Back up lamp
3Turn signal lamp
4Tail, parking, standing and rear fog
lamp (driver’s side)
License plate lamp
1Screws
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Loosen both screws 1 and remove
lamp.
왘Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
lamp.
왘Retighten the screws.
287
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
Removing
왘Fold the wiper arm forward.
왘Press safety tab down 2.
왘Push wiper blade downward 1 and re-
move.
Replacing wiper blade insert
왘Place wiper blade on firm support.
왘Press down both tabs.
왘Slide (direction of arrow) the wiper
blade insert out of the retainer claws.
왘Slide (direction of arrow) the new wiper
blade insert into retainer claws until
tabs are engaged.
Installing
왘Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until
it locks in place.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, remove key from starter
switch before replacing a wiper blade, other-
wise the motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
!
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
288
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
왘Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘Move the selector lever to P (manual
transmission to 1st or reverse gear).
왘Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle
Prepare the vehicle as described under
“Preparing the vehicle” on this page.
왘Take the spare wheel out of the trunk
(컄page 271).
Lifting the vehicle
왘Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘Place one chock in front of and one be-
hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
site to the wheel being changed.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-
ingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, en-
sure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
컄컄
289
Practical hints
Flat tire
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘Place chocks on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
왘Take the two-piece wheel wrench and
the jack out of the vehicle tool kit
(컄page 272). Assemble wheel wrench.
왘On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
proximately one full turn with wrench).
The jack take-up brackets are located di-
rectly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.
1Jack
2Crank
3Take-up bracket
왘Place jack on firm ground.
왘Position jack 1 under the take-up
bracket 3 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an in-
cline.
왘Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while vehi-
cle is raised.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up brack-
et. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
290
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
1Alignment bolt
왘Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and re-
move.
왘Replace this wheel bolt with the align-
ment bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘Remove the remaining bolts.
왘Remove the wheel.
왘Take the spare tire out of the trunk.
Mounting the new wheel
1Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2Wheel bolt for light alloy spare wheel
rim size 4 1/2B x15 H2
왘Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
왘Guide the spare wheel onto the align-
ment bolt and push it on.
왘Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
왘Inflate the spare tire using the electric
pump (컄page 292).
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting spare wheel rim
size 4 1/2B x 15 H2 (컄page 313).
The use of any wheel bolts other than
wheel bolts 2 for spare wheel rim
size 4 1/2B x15 H2 can cause physical
damage to the vehicle.
Warning! G
Be sure to use original lenght wheel bolts
when remounting the original wheel after it
has been repaired.
Warning! G
Inflate spare wheel with collapsible tire only
after the wheel is properly mounted.
Inflate the spare wheel tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
컄컄
291
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Lowering the vehicle
왘Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
ly on its own weight.
왘Remove the jack.
1-5 Wheel bolts
왘Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft lb
(110 Nm).
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while in-
stalling first wheel bolt.
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly
tightened mounting bolts can cause the
wheel to come off. This could cause an acci-
dent. Be sure to use the correct mounting
bolts.
Warning! G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identi-
fied by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
컄컄
292
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed, with handle
folded in.
Inflating the spare tire
왘Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk.
1Flap
2Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
3Union nut
4Electrical plug
Please exercise appropriate caution
왘Open flap 1 on air pump.
왘Pull out electrical plug 4 and air hose
with the pressure gauge 2.
Observe instructions on air pump label.
왘Remove the valve cap from valve.
왘Screw the air hose 2 on to the tire
valve.
왘Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle cig-
arette lighter socket.
왘To switch on the air pump turn the key
in the starter switch to position 1
(컄page 31).
왘Operate air pump until the pressure
gauge displays 36 psi (2.5 bar)
This takes about five minutes for the
space tire. The air hose 2 and the union
nut 3 can become hot during inflation.
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
80 ft lb (110 Nm).
Warning! G
Observe instructions on air pump label.
컄컄
293
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘To switch off the air pump turn the key
in the starter switch to position 0
(컄page 31).
왘If the tire pressure is above 36 psi (2.5
bar), release excess tire pressure using
the vent screw.
왘Detach the electric air pump.
왘Store the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the air
pump back in the trunk.
!
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than six minutes without inter-
ruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again af-
ter it has cooled off.
Warning! G
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
cause they are more likely to become punc-
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinfalted tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
ed by the label on the driver’s door latch
post). Overloading the tires can overheat
them, possibly causing a blowout.
294
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
The battery is located in the engine com-
partment on the right hand side.
Removal of filter box:
왘Release the three clamps 1.
왘Remove filter box.
Installation of filter box:
왘Insert filter box properly.
왘Secure it with the three clamps 1.
Warning! G
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
sult in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery termi-
nal clamps while the engine is running
or the key is in the starter switch. Oth-
erwise the alternator and other elec-
tronic components could be severely
damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Service Booklet for mainte-
nance intervals or contact your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
Warning! G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
295
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Open the hood (컄page 226).
왘Remove the filter box.
왘Disconnect the battery negative lead.
왘Remove the cover from the positive ter-
minal.
왘Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Removing the batteries
왘Remove the screw-nuts securing the
battery.
왘Remove the battery bracket.
왘Take out the battery.
Charging and reinstalling batteries
왘Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
왘Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in re-
verse order.
Reconnecting the batteries
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.
왘Connect the negative lead.
왘Reinstall the filter box.
Warning! G
With a disconnected battery
앫you will no longer be able to turn the key
in the starter switch
앫the selector lever will remain locked in
position P
Warning! G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-
ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
!
NEVER invert the terminal connections!
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
296
Practical hints
Battery
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
i
The following procedures must be car-
ried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-
tion):
앫Set the clock (컄page 116) (vehi-
cles with COMAND*: see COMAND
operator’s manual).
앫Resynchronize the ESP
(컄page 260).
앫Resynchronize side windows
(컄page 184).
앫Resynchronize panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof (컄page 188).
297
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the bat-
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow-
ing:
앫Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic convert-
er are cold.
앫Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12V). Jump start-
ing with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫Always make sure that the jumper ca-
bels are not on or near pulleys, fans or
other parts that move when an engine
is started or running.
Warning! G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
!
Jump starting may only be performed
on the battery installed in the engine
compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
tempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine us-
ing a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several un-
successful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
298
Practical hints
Jump starting
The battery is located in the engine com-
partment on the right hand side. The
terminals for jump starting are located in
front of the battery.
왘Make sure that the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘Turn off the engine.
On both vehicles:
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Apply parking brake.
왘Shift selector lever to position P (man-
ual transmission to Neutral).
1Positive terminal of charged battery
2Positive under hood terminal in front of
discharged battery
3Negative terminal of charged battery
4Negative under hood terminal in front
of discharged battery
왘Connect positive terminal 1 of the
charged battery with under hood
terminal 2 in front of the discharged
battery with the jumper cables. Clamp
cable to charged battery 1 first.
왘Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘Connect negative terminal 3 of the
charged battery with under hood
terminal 4 in front of the discharged
battery with the jumper cables. Clamp
cable to charged battery 3 first.
왘Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
After the engine has started, you can again
turn on the electrical consumers. Do not
turn on the lights under any circumstanc-
es.
왘Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 3 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 1 and 2.
왘Have the battery checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning! G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries
(컄page 231).
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
299
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi-
cle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is pref-
erable to other types of towing.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehi-
cle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip-
ment with key in starter switch turned
to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄page 79) and deactivate the auto-
matic central locking (컄page 122).
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
(key in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
engaged and will apply the rear wheel
brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N (manual transmission:
gears disengaged) and the key must be
in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for dis-
tances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
300
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the transmission, however,
we recommend the drive shaft be dis-
connected at the rear axle drive flange
for any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Warning! G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫the engine will not run
앫there is a malfunction in the power sup-
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately con-
trol the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the key is in
starter switch position 2.
If the key is left in starter switch position 0
for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
key from starter switch and reinsert.
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
key in starter switch to position 2 and
activate the combination switch for the
left or right turn signal in the usual
manner – only the selected turn signal
will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz-
ard warning flasher will operate again.
301
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the braking and steer-
ing systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher de-
gree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accord-
ingly.
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the follow-
ing:
With the automatic central locking acti-
vated and the key in starter switch
position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the
left front wheel as well as the right rear
wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of
approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄page 79).
To prevent the vehicle doors from lock-
ing, deactivate the automatic central
locking (컄page 122).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed tow-
ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
i
If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged
앫the key will not turn in the starter
switch. See notes on the battery
(컄page 294) or on jump starting
(컄page 297).
앫the selector lever will remain
locked in position P. See notes on
manual unlocking of gear selector
lever (컄page 277).
302
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
1Cover on right side of front bumper.
2Cover on right side of rear bumper.
To remove cover:
왘Press mark on cover in direction of ar-
row.
왘Lift cove r off to re veal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the wheel well below the
trunk floor).
왘Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘Fit cover and snap into place.
303
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment
Opening
왘Pry cover 1 open with a screw driver or
similar tool.
왘Remove cover rearward.
Closing
왘Attach the cover in the front.
왘Fold the cover in until it engages.
Fuse chart
The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in
the passenger compartment. The amper-
ages of the fuses are also given there.
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is located in the engine com-
partment on the left-hand side.
1Cover
2Screw
3Retainer
Removing/installing cover
왘Twist screws 2 90° counterclockwise.
왘Pull up cover 1.
왘Slide out retainer 3 and remove cover
by pulling towards front.
왘Install cover 1 in reverse order.
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rat-
ing.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
304
Practical hints
Fuses
Opening fuse box
4Fuse box cover
5Clamps
왘Release clamps 5.
왘Remove cover 4.
Closing fuse box
왘Ensure that the sealing rubber is prop-
erly positioned.
왘Press the cover down and secure with
clamps 5.
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk
The auxiliary fuse box is located in the
trunk behind the left hand trim panel.
1Trim panel
2Handles
Opening trim panel
왘Turn handles 2.
왘Remove trim panel 1.
3Auxiliary fuse box
Fuse extractor
The fuse extractor is found in the cover of
the auxiliary fuse box.
305
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and Tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
306
Technical data
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
Spare parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of original spare parts re-
quired for maintenance and repair work. In
addition, strategically located parts distri-
bution centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
More than 300 000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare
parts should be installed.
!
The use of non-genuine parts and ac-
cessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehi-
cle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s dura-
bility or safety.
307
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the “warranties” printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex-
change or repair any defective parts origi-
nally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫Emission System Warranty
앫Emission Performance Warranty
앫California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
placement. It will be mailed to you.
308
Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels
Certification label
1Certification label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Identification labels and numbers
3Engine number (engraved on engine)
4VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
5Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission con-
trol system
6Emission control label
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
309
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
C230Kompressor
1Power steering pump
2Idler pulley
3Mechanical loader
4Automatic belt tensioner
5Air conditioning compressor
6Crankshaft
7Coolant pump
8Generator (alternator)
C320
1Idler pulley
2Automatic belt tensioner
3Power steering pump
4Air conditioning compressor
5Crankshaft
6Coolant pump
7Generator (alternator)
310
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model C 230 Kompressor (203.740)1
1The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
C 320 (203.764)1
Engine 271 112
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 4 6
Bore 3.23 in (82.00 mm) 3.54 in (89.90 mm)
Stroke 3.35 in (85.00 mm) 3.3 in (84.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 109.6 cu.in. (1796 cm3)195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)
Compression ratio 8.5:1 10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 189 hp/5800 rpm
(141 kW/5800 rpm)
214 hp/5700 rpm
(160 kW/5700 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 192ft.lb/3500rpm
(260 Nm /3500 rpm)
232ft.lb/3000rpm
(310 Nm /3000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Firing order1-3-4-2 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 7ft 11in (2420mm) 7 ft 10 in (2390 mm)
311
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Rims and Tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
앫poor handling characteristics
앫increased noise
앫increased fuel consumption
Same size tires
!
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, ex-
hibit dimensional variations and differ-
ent tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehi-
cle can be the result.
i
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. A tire inflation pressure
table is located on the fuel filler cap of
the vehicle. The tire pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire man-
ufacturer’s maintenance recommenda-
tion included with vehicle.
C230Kompressor
C320
C230Kompressor*
C320*
C230Kompressor
C320
Evolution Package*
Rims (light alloy) 7J x16 H2 7 1/2J x17 7 1/2J x17
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm) 1.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
All season tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91 H
225/45 R17 91 W1225/45 R17 91 W1
1Must not be used with snow chains
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91 H M+S 225/45 R17 91 H M+S1225/45 R17 91 H M+S1
312
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Mixed size tires
C 230 Kompressor*
C320*
Front axle
Rims (light alloy) 7J x16 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91 V
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91 H M+S
Rear axle
Rims (light alloy) 8J x16 H2
Wheel offset 1.26 in (32 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 225/50 R16 92 V1
1Must not be used with snow chains
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91 H M+S
313
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Spare wheel
C230Kompressor C 320
Rim (light alloy) 4 1/2B x15 H2 4 1/2B x16 H2
Wheel offset 0.47 in (12 mm) 0.47 in (12 mm)
Collapsible Tire 165 - 15 89P1165/70 - 16 92P1
1Must not be used with snow chains.
314
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model C230Kompressor C320
Generator (alternator) 14 V/120 A 14 V/120 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.1 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12V/100 Ah 12V/100 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F 6 MPP 332 Bosch F 8 DPP332
NGK PFR 5 R-11
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 18 – 22 ft.lb (25 - 30 Nm) 15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)
315
Technical data
Main Dimensions
Main Dimensions
Model C230Kompressor
C320
Overall vehicle length 171.0 in (4345 mm)
Overall vehicle width 68.0 in (1728 mm)
Overall vehicle height 55.4 in (1406 mm)
Wheelbase 106.9 in (2715 mm)
Track, front 58.8 in (1493 mm)
Track, rear 57.6 in (1464 mm)
316
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
317
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
brands tested and recommended by us.
Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser-
vice Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine with oil filter C 230 Kompressor
C320
5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
Recommended engine oils
Automatic transmission 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil1
1MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10
Manual transmission 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Manual Transmission Oil2
2MB part no. 001 989 26 03 10
Rear axle 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system 0.5 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system C 230 Kompressor
C320
approx. 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
approx. 10.5 US qt (10.0 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent
318
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
16.4 US gal (62.0 l)
2.1 US gal (8.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning sys-
tem:
Without headlamp clean-
ing system
With headlamp cleaning
system
3.2 US qt (3 l)
6.4 US qt (6 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available pre-
mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄page 324).
319
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
only engine oils recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recom-
mended brands is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Please follow FSS recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may be harmful to the engine opera-
tion.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air condition-
ing system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu-
bricating oil, otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
ous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bub-
bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
tem’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be re-
placed every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
vide you with additional information.
320
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements
Use only premium unleaded meeting
ASTM standard D 439:
앫The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane num-
ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure etc.
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gaso-
line must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
앫Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
앫Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
앫Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two per-
sons and no luggage.
앫Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum ac-
celerator pedal position if the vehi-
cle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
321
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufac-
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build up of carbon depos-
its.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to en-
gine performance problems such as:
앫Warm-up hesitation
앫Unstable idle
앫Knocking/pinging
앫Misfire
앫Power loss
Do not blend any specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cost and may be harmful to engine opera-
tion.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
vides:
앫Corrosion protection
앫Freeze protection
앫Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro-
sion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool-
ant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used
year-round to provide the necessary corro-
sion protection and increase boil over pro-
tection. You should have it replaced every
15 years or 150 000 miles (250 000 km),
whichever comes first.
322
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Coolant system design and coolant used
stipulate the replacement interval. The
above replacement interval is only applica-
ble if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see Facto-
ry Approved Service Products pamphlet)
are used to renew the coolant concentra-
tion or bring it back up to the proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticor-
rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If
you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec-
tion to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
Therefore, do not use more than this
amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
be used to bring it up to the proper level
(have cooling system checked for signs of
leakage). Please make sure that the mix-
ture is in accordance with label instruc-
tions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, con-
sult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
nents in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifical-
ly formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorro-
sion/antifreeze coolant will result in a sig-
nificantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/Anti-
freeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
323
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
C230Kompressor 4.2 US qt (4.0 l) 4.7 US qt (4.4 l)
C320 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) 5.3 US qt (5.0 l)
324
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approx.
앫6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with head-
lamp cleaning system*
앫3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without
headlamp cleaning system
왘Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or con-
centrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer sol-
vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫1 part “S” to 100 parts water
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water]
For temperatures below freezing use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may burn.
You can be seriously burned.
325
Technical data
Consumer information
Consumer information
The following text is published as required
of all manufacturers of passenger cars un-
der Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regula-
tions, Part 575 pursuant to the “National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966”.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1½) times as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Tread wear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
Warning! G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straightahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
326
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning! G
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
327
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is in-
stalled on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (indicator
lamp 7 in the center console lights
up). See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the pas-
senger side airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situa-
tions. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more in-
tense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service cen-
ter, which can help you with any ques-
tions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a break-
down.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control ve-
hicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passen-
ger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
328
Technical terms
Collapsible tire
An especially compact spare tire that
must be inflated with a provided air
pump before using. It should only be
used to bring the vehicle to the nearest
service station.
COMAND*
(Cockpit Management and Data Sys-
tem)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and navi-
gation system, as well as for other op-
tional equipment (CD changer,
telephone, etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to ad-
just settings.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for auto-
matically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine pro-
duced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (vis-
cosity) of the oil at different tempera-
tures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tol-
erate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and direc-
tional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the sys-
tem's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the multifunction
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
329
Technical terms
GPS*
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special re-
ceivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, in-
cluding the tachometer, speedometer
and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmis-
sion down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehi-
cle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or un-
locked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions for
each key.
Menu
The control system displays are ar-
ranged in menus. Each menu contains
a number of commands for particular
systems. In the Audio menu, for exam-
ple, you will find the commands
Select
radio station
or
Operate CD player
.
Using commands you can directly
change the settings for your vehicle.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized meth-
od. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as AN-
TI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
Display field in the instrument cluster
used to present information provided
by the control system.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operat-
ing the control system.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this en-
gine speed range, as it may result in se-
rious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
330
Technical terms
Power train
Collective term designating all compo-
nents used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, includ-
ing
앫engine
앫clutch/torque converter
앫transmission
앫transfer case
앫drive shaft
앫differential
앫axle shafts/axles
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmis-
sion between standard operation S and
winter operation W.
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and cur-
rent location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for sub-
scribers to Tele Aid service.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and
child restraint systems. As indepen-
dant systems, their protective func-
tions complement one another.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gaso-
line as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gaso-
line's ability to resist undesired detona-
tion (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as AN-
TI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector le-
ver from being moved out of position P
without key turned and brake pedal de-
pressed.
331
Technical terms
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de-
vice and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid* System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
mand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and man-
ual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
tivated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquain-
tance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
viding that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not dam-
aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is ap-
proved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio sys-
tems (radio, CD, etc.).
332
333
Index
A
ABS 23, 73, 327
ABS control 74
Malfunction indicator lamp 247
Messages in display 253
Warning lamp 247
Accelerator position, automatic transmis-
sion 137
Accident
In case of 50
Activating
Air conditioning (cooling) 148, 157
Air recirculation mode 146, 154
Anti-theft alarm system 78
Automatic climate control 151
Central locking (control system) 122
Climate control 143
Defrost 146, 154
Easy-entry/exit feature 123
ESP 77
Exterior headlamps 47
Exterior lamps 97
Hazard warning flasher 99
Headlamps 47
High beams 99
Ignition 31
Immobilizer 53, 78
Rear fog lamp 97
Rear window defroster 147, 156
Residual heat 158
Seat heater* 92
Tow-away alarm 79
Windshield wipers 48
Adding
Coolant 230
Engine oil 228
Additional turn signals 280
Adjustable air outlets, rear passenger com-
partment 149, 158
Adjusting 32
Air distribution 145, 153
Air volume 145, 153
Backrest tilt 33, 35
Exterior rear view mirror 40
Head restraint height 33, 35, 37
Head restraint tilt 34, 35
Head restraints 37
Inside rear view mirror 39
Instrument cluster illumination 102
Manual seat 33
Mirrors 39
Rear seat head restraints 36
Seat cushion tilt 33, 35
Seat fore and aft adjustment 33, 34
Seat height 33, 35
Seats 32
Steering column height 39
Steering column length 39
Steering wheel 37
Air conditioner (cooling)
Turning off 148, 157
Turning on 148, 157
Air conditioner refrigerant 319
Air distribution
Adjusting 145, 153
Air outlets, rear passenger compartment
Adjustable 149, 158
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure 234
Air recirculation mode 146, 154
Activating 146, 154
Deactivating 147, 155
Air volume
Adjusting 145, 153
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 251
Airbags 57
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 327
BabySmartTM deactivation system 67
334
Index
Children 58
Front 61
Passenger 61
Safety guidelines 60
Side impact 61
Window curtain 61
Alarm
Audible 72, 79
Canceling 79
Visual 78
Alarm system
Anti-theft 78
Alignment bolt 290
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 327
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 322
Antiglare
Automatic 138
Antilock brake system (ABS) 327
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 78
Canceling alarm 79
Disarming 79
Anti-theft systems 78
Anti-theft alarm system 78
Immobilizer 78
Tow-away alarm 79
Aquaplaning 219
Armrest
Storage compartment in front of 196
Storage spaces 197
Ashtray 198
ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 229
AUDIO menu 110
Selecting radio station 111
Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation 159
Button and soft key operation 162
Cassette mode 168
CD mode 172
Operating and display elements 160
Operating safety 159
Operation 162
Radio mode 165
Switching off 162
Switching on 162
Telephone operation 176
Audio systems 159
Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror
138
Automatic central locking
Activating/deactivating (control sys-
tem) 122
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution 153
Air recirculation mode 154
Deactivating 148
Defrosting 154
Rear window defroster 156
Residual heat utilization 158
Residual ventilation 158
Setting the temperature 152
Automatic climate control* 150
Automatic headlamp mode 97
Automatic lighting control
Activating 100
Deactivating 100
Automatic locking when driving 87
Automatic transmission 132
Accelerator position 137
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 137
Fluid level 229
Gear ranges 134
Gear selector lever position 135
Gear shifting malfunctions 137
Kickdown 137
Manual shifting 133
One-touch gearshifting 133
335
Index
Program mode selector switch 136
Selector lever position 132
Starting with 45
Transmission fluid 229
Winter program mode 136
Auxiliary fuse box 304
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 67
Compatible child seats 67, 327
Self-test 68
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system
327
Backrest
Folding forward 193
Folding rearward 193
BAS 74, 327
Messages in display 254
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 276
Check lamp 83
Checking 84
Battery discharged
Jump starting 297
Battery, vehicle 231, 294
Charging 295
Disconnecting 295
Messages in display 270
Reconnecting 295
Reinstalling 295
Removing 295
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 327
Bi-Xenon type
Front lamp bulbs 283
Block heater 237
Bolts
For spare wheel 273
Brake assist system (BAS) 327
Brake fluid 225, 319
Brake lamp bulbs 281
Brake lamp, high mounted 281
Brake pads
Message in display 256
Brakes 216
Warning lamp 249
Break-in period 214
Bulbs, replacing 280
Additional turn signals 280
Brake lamps 281
Fog lamps 280
Front lamps 280
High beam 280
High mounted brake lamp 281
License plate lamps 281, 286
Low beam 280
Parking lamps 280, 281, 283, 284
Rear fog lamp 281
Rear fog lamps 285
Side marker lamps 280, 285
Standing lamps 280, 281, 283, 284
Tail lamp assemblies 281, 285
Turn signal lamps 280, 281
Button
Audio system 162
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 327
Calling up
Range (distance to empty) 126
Service indicator 239
CAN system 327
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 317
Cargo compartment
Lighting 101
Casette mode
Playing cassettes 168
336
Index
Cassette player
Operating 112
Catalytic converter 222
CD changer* 172
CD mode 172
CD player
Operating 111
Center console 25
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 251
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 117
Central locking
From inside 87
Switch 87
Switching on/off (control system) 122
Unlocking from inside 87
Central locking switch 87
Certification label 308
Changing
Batteries (SmartKey) 276
Key setting 123
Changing CDs 172
Charcoal filter 156
Charging
Vehicle battery 295
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 250
Checking
Coolant level 225, 229
Oil level 225, 227
Tire inflate pressure 225
Vehicle lighting 225
Child safety 65
Airbags 58
Infant and child restraint systems 62,
65
LATCH child seat mounts 70
Child seat mounts see LATCH child seat
mounts 70
Cigarette lighter 199
Cleaning
Cup holder 243
Gear selector lever 243
Hard plastic trim items 244
Headlamps 140
Headliner 244
Instrument cluster 243
Leather upholstery 244
Light alloy wheels 243
MB Tex upholstery 244
Plastic and rubber parts 244
Seat belts 244
Steering wheel 243
Windows 243
Windshield 49
Wiper blades 243
Climate control 142
Adjusting 145
Defogging windshield 145
Defrosting 146
Rear window defroster 147
Setting the temperature 145
Clock 23, 116
Closing
Glove box 195
Hood 227
Side windows 182
Sliding/pop-up roof 186, 278
Sliding/pop-up roof with SmartKey
187
Sunshades for the
sliding/pop-up roof 185
Trunk lid 86
Windows 182
Windows with SmartKey 183
Closing sliding/pop-up roof
In an emergency 278
337
Index
Cockpit 20, 327
Cockpit management and data system
(COMAND*) 328
Collapsible tire 328
COMAND* 328
COMAND* see separate operating
instructions
Combination switch 99
High beam flasher 48, 99
Turn signals 47
Windshield wipers 48
Consumer information 325
Control and operation of
radio transmitters 222
Control system 105, 328
AUDIO menu 110
Convenience submenu 123
Display digital speedometer 110
Functions 106, 109
Instrument cluster submenu 116
Lighting submenu 119
Malfunction memory menu 112
Menus 108, 109, 329
Multifunction display 105
Multifunction steering wheel 106
NAV menu 112
Selecting radio system 111
Settings menu 114
Standard display menu 110
Submenus 107, 109
TEL* menu 126
Trip computer menu 125
Vehicle submenu 122
Convenience submenu 123
Activating easy-entry/exit feature 123
Setting key dependency 124
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 124
Coolant 229, 321
Adding 230
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity 322
Capacities 317
Checking level 229
Messages in display 257, 258
Temperature 223
Temperature gauge 102
Warning lamp 258
Coolant level
Checking 225, 229
Cruise control 189, 328
Canceling 190
Driving downhill 190
Driving uphill 190
Fine adjustment 191
Saving current speed 190
Setting speeds 191
Cruise control lever 189
Cup holder
Cleaning 243
In front seat armrest 196
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 327
D
Daytime running lamp mode 98
Setting 119
Deactivating
Air conditioning (cooling) 148
Air recirculation mode 147, 155
Alarm 79
Anti-theft alarm system 79
Automatic climate control 151
Central locking (control system) 122
Climate control 143
Cruise control 190
Defrost 146, 154
Engine with the key 53
ESP 76
Exterior lamps 97
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 120
338
Index
Front fog lamps 120
Hazard warning flasher 99
Headlamps 52
Immobilizer 78
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 121
Rear window defroster 147, 156
Residual heat 158
Seat heater 92
Tow-away alarm 80
Deep water see Standing water 221
Defogging
Windshield 145, 153
Defrosting 146, 154
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps 120
Interior lighting 121
Dialing
A number (telephone) 128
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while
driving 50
With starting 45
Digital speedometer 110
Direction of rotation (tires) 234
Discharged battery
Jump starting 297
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 295
Display
Selecting 118
Display elements
Audio system 160
Displays
Digital speedometer 110
Messages 229, 252
Selecting 118
Service indicator 238
Showing malfunctions 113
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 125
Door control panel 27
Door handle 27
Door unlock
With Tele Aid* 208
Doors
Message in display 260
Opening from inside vehicle 85
Opening from outside 83
Downhill driving
Cruise control 190
Downshifting 131, 133
Drink holder see Cup holder 196
Drinking and driving 215
Driving
Aquaplaning 219
General instructions 41, 215
In winter 220
Problems 50
Safety systems 73
Through standing water 221
Driving abroad 221
Driving instructions 215
Driving off 217
Driving safety systems
ABS 73
BAS 74
ESP 75
Driving systems 189
Cruise control 189
Driving safety systems 73
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 89
Activating 123
Interrupting movement 123
Electrical fuses 303
Electrical system
Technical data 314
339
Index
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP 23, 75, 328
Emergency call
Telephone 179
Emergency call system* 201
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 204
With Tele Aid* 202
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 137
Emergency operations
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 278
Locking the vehicle 275
Opening sliding/pop-up roof 278
Remote door unlock 208
Unlocking the vehicle 274
Emergency release
Trunk lid 86
Emergency tensioning device
see ETD 64, 328
Emission control 223
Emission control label 308
Ending
A call (telephone) 128
Engine
Compartment 226
Message in display 250
Starting with automatic transmission
45
Starting with manual transmission 44
Starting with the key 45
Technical data 310
Turning off with the key 52
Engine cleaning 242
Engine compartment 226
Fuse box in 303
Hood 226
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 23, 250
Engine number 328
Engine oil 227, 319
Adding 228
Additives 319
Checking level 227
Consumption 227
Display messages 262
Filler neck 228
Messages in display 229, 262
Viscosity 328
Engine oil level see Oil level 225
ESP 23, 75, 328
Messages in display 260
Switching off 76
Switching on 77
Warning lamp 246
ETD 328
Safety guidelines 60
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 64
Exterior lamp switch 96
Exterior lamps
Delayed shut-off 120
Exterior rear view mirror
Activating parking position 140
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 40
Parking position for 124
F
Fahrenheit
Setting temperature units 117
Fastening the seat belts 41
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 191
First aid kit 271
Flat tire 288
Inflating the spare tire 292
Lowering the vehicle 291
Mounting the spare wheel 288
Preparing the vehicle 288
Spare wheel 271
340
Index
Flexible Service System (FSS) 238, 328
Fog lamp, rear 98, 281
Fog lamps
Replacing bulbs 280
Fog lamps, front
Messages in display 266
Replacing bulbs 281
Switching on 98
Front airbags 61
Front lamps
Bi-Xenon type 283
Halogen-type 282
Messages in display 264–267
Replacing bulbs 280, 282
Switching on 96
Front seat backrest
Folding backrest back 36
Folding backrest forward 35
Front seat head restraints
Installing 90
Manual seat 90
Power seat* 90
Removing 90
Front seats
Heater 91
FSS (Flexible Service System) 238, 328
Fuel 225
Additives 321
Fuel reserve warning lamp 250
Gasoline additives 321
Premium unleaded gasoline 225, 318,
320
Requirements 320
Reserve warning 23
Technical data 317
Fuel additives 321
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 125
Since last reset 125
Fuel filler flap 224
Locking 224
Opening 277
Unlocking 224
Fuel requirements 320
Fuel reserve tank
Message in display 263
Fuel tank
Capacity 318
Filler flap 224
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities 317
Functions (control system) 106, 109
Resetting 115
Fuse box 303
Fuse chart 303
Fuse extractor 304
Fuses 303
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 304
Fuse box in engine compartment 303
Fuse box in passenger compartment
303
Fuse chart 303
Fuse extractor 304
G
Garage door opener 26, 209
Erasing in remote control 212
Integrated remote control 210
Rolling code programming 211
Gasoline see Fuel 225
Gasoline additives 321
Gear range 328
Automatic transmission 134
Limiting 134
Shifting into optimal 133
Gear range limit
Canceling 133
341
Index
Gear selector lever
Cleaning 243
Position 135
Global
Locking 83
Unlocking 83
Global Positioning System (GPS) 329
Glove box 21, 195
Closing 195
Opening 195
Good visibility 138
GPS 329
GPS see COMAND* 207
H
Halogen-type
Front lamp bulbs 282
Hand-held transmitter
Programming integrated remote
control 210
Hands-free microphone 26
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 244
Hazard warning flasher 99
Switching off 99
Switching on 99
Head restraints 90
Manual seats 33
Power seats* 35
Rear seats 36
Headlamp cleaning system 232
Headlamps
Automatic control 97
Bi-Xenon 327
Bi-Xenon type*
Replacing bulbs 283
Cleaning 242
Cleaning system 140, 232
Halogen-type
Replacing bulbs 282
Refilling washer fluid 232
Switching off 52
Switching on 47
Washer fluid 324
Washer system 324
Headliner
Cleaning 244
Heated seats 91
Height adjustment
Head restraints 33, 35, 37
Seat belts 43
Steering wheel 37
High beam flasher 48, 99
High beam headlamps
Messages in display 265
Replacing bulbs 280, 282
Switching on 99
High beam headlamps xenon type
Replacing bulbs 283
High mounted brake lamp 281
Hood 226
Closing 227
Message in display 263
Opening 226
Hydroplaning see Aquaplaning 219
I
Identification labels 308
Certification label 308
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
308
Ignition 31
Switching on 45
Immobilizer 78
Activating 78
Deactivating 78
Infant and child restraint systems 65
Installing 69
LATCH child seat mounts 70
342
Index
Inflating
Spare tire 292
Information
Button for Tele Aid* 206
Inside rear view mirror
Adjusting 39
Antiglare 138
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 69
Towing eye bolt 302
Wiper blades 287
Instrument cluster 22, 102, 329
Cleaning 243
Coolant temperature gauge 102
Illumination 102
Lamps in 246–250
Multifunction display 105
Outside temperature indicator 104
Selecting language 118
Instruments and controls see Cockpit 20
Integrated remote control
Canadian programming 211
Erasing memory 212
Hand-held transmitter 210
Operating 212
Rolling code programming 211
Interior lighting 100
Activating automatic control 100
Deactivating automatic control 100
Delayed shut-off 121
Manual operation 100
Interior storage spaces 195
Armrest 197
Cup holder 196
Glove box 195
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
198
Storage compartment in front of arm-
rest 196
J
Jack 272
Jump starting 297
K
Key dependency memory
Settings 124
Key positions in starter switch 31
Key, mechanical 274, 275
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 83
Changing the batteries 276
Checking the batteries 84
Factory setting 83
Global locking 83
Global unlocking 83
Loss of 84
Positions in starter switch 31
Remote controls 82
Restoring to factory setting 83
Selective setting 83
Starting the engine 45
Turning off the engine 53
Unlocking with 30
Keys 82
Kickdown 137, 329
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 117
Km/h or mph in speedometer 117
L
Labels, identification 308
Lamp bulbs, exterior 280
Lamps, exterior
Front 280
Light sensor 263
Messages in display 264–267
Rear 281
343
Index
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 247
Airbag Off 61
Battery (SmartKey) 83
Brakes 249
CHECK ENGINE 250
Coolant 257
Engine diagnostics 250
ESP 246
Fuel reserve 250
Instrument cluster 246–250
Seat belts 250
Service indicator 238
SRS 57
Turn signals 23
Language
Multifunction display 118
Setting 118
LATCH child seat mounts 70
Folding back 70
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 309
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 244
License plate lamps
Messages in display 266
Replacing bulbs 281, 286
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 243
Technical data 311
Light sensor 263
Lighter see Cigarette lighter 199
Lighting 96
Automatic headlamp mode 97
Combination switch 99
Daytime running lamp mode 98
Exterior lamp switch 96
Front fog lamps 98
High beam flasher 99
High beams 99
Instrument cluster illumination 102
Interior 100
Locator lighting 98
Low beam 96
Manual headlamp mode 97
Night security illumination 98
Parking lamps 96
Rear fog lamp 98
Settings (control system) 119
Trunk 101
Limiting the gear range 134
Limp Home Mode 137
Loading 192
Instructions 194
Roof rack 192
Split rear bench seat 192
Locator lighting 98
Setting 120
Lock button 329
Lock buttons 329
Locking 51, 82
Fuel filler flap 224
Global, SmartKey 83
Vehicle in an emergency 275
Loss of keys 84
Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 307
Low beam headlamps
Messages in display 264
Replacing bulbs 280, 282
Lowering
Vehicle 291
Lubricants
Technical data 317
Luggage cover 192
M
Main dimensions 315
Maintenance 238
344
Index
Malfunction
Displaying 113
Malfunction memory 112
Calling up 112
Manual headlamp mode 97
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 277
Interior lighting control 100
Locking the vehicle 275
Sliding/pop-up roof 278
Unlocking the driver’s door 274
Unlocking the trunk lid 275
Unlocking transmission selector lever
277
Manual seat
Adjusting 33
Adjusting backrest tilt 33
Adjusting head restraint height 33
Adjusting head restraint tilt 34
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 33
Adjusting seat height 33
Front seat head restraints 90
Seat fore and aft adjustment 33
Manual transmission 130
Shifting into reverse 131
Starting with 44
MAXCOOL maximum cooling 154
MB Tex upholstery
Cleaning 244
Mechanical key 274, 275
Memory function 93, 329
Recalling positions from memory 94
Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
ing positions 95
Storing key dependent settings 94
Menus 106
AUDIO 110
Control system 329
In control system 108, 109
Malfunction memory 112
NAV 112
Settings menu 114
Standard display 110
Submenus 107
TEL* 126
Trip computer 125
Microphone
Hands-free microphone 26
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 117
Mirrors
Adjusting 39
Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror
138
Exterior rear view mirror 40
Exterior rear view mirror parking posi-
tions 124
Inside rear view mirror 39
Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
ing position 95
MON 225
MON (Motor Octane Number) 329
Mph or km/h in speedometer 117
Multifunction display 105, 329
Selecting language 118
Standard display 109
Multifunction display messages
ABS 253
BAS 254
Battery 270
Brake fluid 256
Brake pads 256
Check engine 250
Coolant 258
Coolant level 257
Display 270
345
Index
Doors 260
Engine 250
Engine oil level 262
ESP 260
Fuel reserve tank 263
Hood 263
Key 263
Lamps 264–267
Parking brake 267
Power steering fluid 268
Steering wheel adjust 268
Tailgate 269
Tele Aid 269
Telephone* 269
Washer fluid 270
Multifunction steering wheel 24, 106, 329
Buttons 106
N
Navigation system
Operating 112
See separate COMAND* operating in-
structions
Night security illumination 98
Setting 120
O
Occupant safety 56
Airbags 57
Children and airbags 58
Children in the vehicle 65
Fastening the seat belt 41
Infant and child restraint systems 65
LATCH child seat mounts 70
Seat belts 41, 60
Odometer, main 23
Oil
Adding 228
Checking level 227
Consumption 227
Dipstick 227
Filler neck 228
Viscosity 328
Oil level
Checking 225
One-touch gearshifting 133
Canceling gear range limit 133
Downshifting 133
Upshifting 133
Opening
Ashtray 198
Doors from the inside 85
Fuel filler flap 224
Fuel filler flap manually 277
Glove box 195
Hood 226
Side windows 183
Sliding/pop-up roof 186, 278
Sliding/pop-up roof in an emergency
278
Sliding/pop-up roof with SmartKey
187
Sunshades for the sliding/pop-up roof
185
Trunk lid 85
Windows 182
Windows with SmartKey 183
Operating
Audio system 159
Cassette player 112
CD player 111
COMAND* see separate operating
instructions
Garage door opener 212
Integrated remote control 212
Navigation system 112
Radio 111
Radio transmitters 222
346
Index
Telephone 159
Telephone* 126, 176
Operating safety
Audio system 159
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 242
Outside temperature indicator 104
Overdue service 238
Overhead control panel 26
Overspeed range 329
P
Paintwork 241
Panic alarm 72
Panic button on SmartKey 72
Parcel net
In front passenger footwell 198
Parking 51, 217
Parking brake 46, 51
Engaging 51
Message in display 267
Releasing 46
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 280, 281, 283, 284
Switching on 96
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 95, 124
Parts see Spare parts service 306
Passenger compartment 221
Fuse box in 303
Inside rear view mirror 39
Interior lighting 100
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
198
Passenger safety see Occupant safety 56
Pedals 215
Phone book*
Loading 128
Quick search 128
Phone number*
Dialing 128
Redialing 129
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 244
Playing
CDs 173
Poly-V-belt drive 330
Layout 309
Positions (Memory function*)
Recalling from memory 94
Storing into memory 94
Power assistance 216
Power seat*
Adjusting backrest tilt 35
Adjusting head restraint height 35
Adjusting head restraint tilt 35
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35
Adjusting seat height 35
Front seat head restraints 90
Seat fore and aft adjustment 34
Power steering fluid
Message in display 268
Power train 330
Power washer 241
Power windows 182
Side windows 182
Practical hints
First aid kit 271
Fuses 303
Lamp in center console 251
Lamps in instrument cluster 246
Messages in the display 252
Spare wheel 271
Spare wheel bolts 273
Towing the vehicle 299
Vehicle jack 272
Vehicle tool kit 272
Premium unleaded gasoline 320
347
Index
Problems
While driving 50
Program mode selector switch 330
Automatic transmission 136
Q
Quick search
Phone book* 128
R
Radio
Selecting stations 111
Station search 111
Station selection setting 122
Radio mode 165
Radio see Radio mode
Radio transmitters, control
and operation 222
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 126
Rapid seat heating
Switching on 92
Reading lamp 26
Rear bench seat
Foldable 192
Rear fog lamp 281
Bulb 281
Switching on 98
Rear lamp bulbs
Replacing 285
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear passenger compartment
Adjustable air outlets 149, 158
Rear seat head restraints 91
Adjusting 36
Folding back 37
Installing 91
Placing upright 37
Removing 91
Rear seats
Adjusting head restraint height 37
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 138
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 147, 156
Activating 147, 156
Deactivating 147, 156
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 295
Refrigerant
Air conditioner 319
Regular checks 225
Reinstalling vehicle battery 295
Remote controls
Integrated 210
SmartKey 82
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid* 208
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 330
Removing
Vehicle battery 295
Wheel 290
Wiper blade insert 287
Wiper blades 287
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 285
Brake lamp bulbs 285
Bulbs 280
Front lamp bulbs 282
Front turn signal bulbs 282, 283
High beam bulbs 282
High beam bulbs (xenon-type head-
lamps) 283
License plate lamp bulbs 286
Low beam bulbs 282
Parking lamp bulbs 283, 284
Rear fog lamp bulbs 285
Rear lamp bulbs 281, 285
348
Index
Rear turn signal bulbs 285
Side marker lamp bulbs 285
Standing lamp bulbs 283, 284
Wiper blades 287
Reset knob in the instrument cluster 114
Resetting
All functions (control system) 114
All functions of a submenu 115
Fuel consumption 125
Service indicator (FSS) 239
Trip odometer 103
Residual heat utilization 158, 330
Residual ventilation 158
REST (Residual engine heat utilization) 330
Restraint system see Infant and child re-
straint systems 65, 69
Reverse (manual transmission)
Shifting into 131
Rims 311
Roadside assistance
Tele Aid* 204
Rolling code programming 211
RON 225
RON (Research Octane Number) 330
Roof rack 192
Rotating wheels 235
Rubber parts
Cleaning 244
S
Safety
Occupant 56
Safety belts see Seat belts 41
Safety systems
Driving 73
Saving current speed 190
Searching
Radio station 111
Seat belt force limiter 64
Seat belt outlet height adjustment 43
Seat belts 62
Cleaning 244
Fastening 41
Height adjustment 43
Proper use of 43, 63
Safety guidelines 60
Warning lamp 250
Seat heater*
Switching off 92
Switching on 92
Seats 89
Adjusting 32
Easy entry/exit feature 89
Heater 91
Manual 33
Rapid seat heating 92
Split rear bench seat 192
Selecting
Display 118
Selector lever 23
Lock 45
Position (automatic transmission) 23,
132
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys-
tem 68
Tele Aid* 202
Service
Calling up the service indicator 239
Major service (Service B) 238
Minor service (Service A) 238
Overdue 238
Spare parts 306
Types 238
When due 238
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 307
349
Index
Service indicator 238
Calling up 239
Clearing 238, 239
Service life (tires) 234
Service System see FSS 238
Setting
Convenience functions 115, 123
Cruise control 190
Daytime running lamp mode 119
Exterior rear view mirror parking posi-
tion 95
Higher speed in cruise control 191
Hours (clock) 116
Individual vehicle settings 114
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 121
Key dependent memory 124
Lamps and lighting (control system)
119
Language, multifunction display 118
Locator lighting 120
Lower speed in cruise control 191
Miles/kilometers in speedometer 117
Minutes (clock) 116
Night security illumination 120
Parking position for exterior rear view
mirrors 124
Slower speed in cruise control 191
Speed in cruise control 191
Speedometer display mode 117
Station selection mode 122
Temperature (interior) 145, 152
Temperature indicator 117
Time display mode (Clock) 117
Units
Speedometer 117
Temperature 117
Settings
Convenience functions 123
Factory, SmartKey 83
Individual (SmartKey) 124
Lighting (control system) 119
Menus and submenus 107
Resetting all (control system) 114
Resetting in the submenu 115
Selective 83
Settings menu
Functions in 114
Individual vehicle settings 114
Submenus 114
Shift lock 330
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 135
Gearshift lever 130
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 133
Into reverse (manual transmission) 131
Side impact airbags 61
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 280, 281, 285
Side windows
Automatic opening 183
Cleaning 243
Closing 182, 183
Closing with SmartKey 183
Opening 182, 183
Opening fully 183
Opening with SmartKey 183
Stopping 183
Signal strength (telephone*) 127
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 49
Single wipe 49
Sliding/pop-up roof 185
Closing 186, 278
Closing with SmartKey 187
Opening 186, 278
350
Index
Opening with SmartKey 187
Stopping 186
Synchronizing 188, 279
SmartKey
Changing battery 276
Locking and unlocking 82
Opening and closing the slid-
ing/pop-up roof with 187
Opening and closing windows with 183
Unlocking with 30
Snow chains 237
Soft keys
Audio system 162
Spare parts service 306
Spare tire
Inflating 292
Spare wheel* 271
Bolts 273
Mounting 288
Speed
Saving current 190
Speed settings
Cruise control 191
Speedometer 23
Settings units 117
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 117
Split rear bench seat 192
SRS 63, 331
Indicator lamp 248
Standing lamps 96
Replacing bulbs 280, 281, 283, 284
Standing water
Driving instructions 221
Starter switch 21, 31
Positions 31
Starting difficulties 45
Starting position 31
Starting the engine 44
Station (radio)
Search 111
Station selection
Setting 122
Steering column
Height adjustment 38, 39
Length adjustment 38, 39
Steering wheel
Adjusting 37
Buttons 24
Cleaning 243
Electrical adjustment 38
Height adjustment 39
Manual adjustment 38
Steering wheel adjust
Message in display 268
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 209
Stopping
Sliding/pop-up roof 186
Sunshades for the
sliding/pop-up roof 185
Windows 183
Storage compartments
Armrest 196
Glove box 195
Ventilated compartments 148
Storage spaces
Cup holder 196
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 94
Submenus
Convenience 123
For settings 107
In control system 109
Instrument cluster 116
Lighting 119
351
Index
Resetting functions in
Control system 115
Selecting 114
Settings menu 114
Vehicle 122
Sun visors 141
Sunshades for the sliding/pop-up roof
Closing 185
Opening 185
Stopping 185
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 331
Switching off
Audio system 162
Automatic central locking
(control system) 122
Delayed (exterior lamps) 120
Engine 52
ESP 76
Hazard warning flasher 99
Headlamps 52
Seat heating 92
Switching on
Audio system 162
Automatic central locking
(control system) 122
ESP 77
Front fog lamps 98
Hazard warning flasher 99
Headlamps 47
High beams 99
Rapid seat heating 92
Rear fog lamp 98
Seat heating* 92
Windshield wipers 48
Synchronizing
Sliding/pop-up roof 188, 279
T
Tachometer 23, 103
Displaying gear range 134
Overspeed range 103
Tail lamps
Cleaning 242
Replacing bulbs 281, 285
Tailgate
Message in display 269
Tar stains 241
Technical data 319
Brake fluid 319
Coolant 317
Coolants 321
Electrical system 314
Engine 310
Engine oil 319
Engine oil additives 319
Fuel requirements 320
Fuels 317
Gasoline additives 321
Lubricants 317
Main dimensions 315
Premium unleaded gasoline 320
Rims and tires 311
Weights 316
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 318, 324
Tele Aid
Information 206
Initiating an emergency call
manually 204
Messages in display 269
Roadside assistance 204
Tele Aid System 201
Tele Aid System 331
Tele Aid* 201
Emergency calls 202
Remote door unlock 208
Stolen vehicle tracking services 209
System self-check 202
Upgrade signals 207
352
Index
Telephone
Emergency call 179
Telephone* 24, 200
Answering a call 128
Dialing a number from the phone book
128
Ending a call 128
Hands-free microphone 26
Loading phone book* 128
Messages in display 269
Operating 126
Operation 176
Redialing 129
Temperature
Display mode 117
Grades of tires 326
Setting interior temperature 145
Setting units in display 117
Tires 235
Tightening torque 331
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 291
Tilt
Backrest 33
Head restraint 34
Seat cushion 33
Time
Setting hours 116
Setting minutes 116
Time display
Setting 117
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 225, 234
Tire speed rating 219, 331
Tire traction 219
Tires 233, 311
Collapsible 328
Consumer information 325
Direction of rotation 234
Driving instructions 218
Retreads 233
Rims and tires 311
Service life 234
Temperature 235
Temperature grades 326
Tread depth 236
Wear pattern 235
Winter 236
Tools 272
Tow-away alarm 25, 79
Arming 79
Disarming 79
Disarming for transport 79
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)
Installing 302
Towing the vehicle 299
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 209
Traction 136, 325, 331
Transmission see
Automatic transmission 229
Transmission selector lever 277
Unlocking manually 277
Tread depth (tires) 236
Treadwear 325
Trim panel
Opening 304
Trip computer 125
Trip odometer
Resetting 103
Trunk
Auxiliary fuse box 304
Lighting 101
Trunk lid 85
Trunk lid
Closing 86
Emergency release 86
Opening 85
353
Index
Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 280, 281
Turn signals 47
Additional in mirrors 280
Cleaning lenses 242
Front bulbs 280, 282, 284
Indicator lamps 23
Rear bulbs 281, 286
Turning off
Engine 52
U
Units
Setting speedometer units 117
Setting temperature units 117
Unlocking 30, 82
Driver’s door in an emergency 274
Fuel filler flap 224
Global 83
In an emergency 274
Selective settings 83
Transmission selector lever
manually 277
Trunk lid in an emergency 275
Vehicle in an emergency 208
With the SmartKey 30
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid* 207
Uphill driving
Cruise control 190
Upshifting 133
Useful features 195
Ashtrays 198
Cigarette lighter 199
Garage door opener 209
Interior storage spaces 195
Tele Aid* 201
Telephone* 200
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 114, 115
Locking 25
Locking in an emergency 275
Lowering 291
Service battery 294
Towing 299
Unlocking 25
Unlocking in an emergency 274
Vehicle battery 294
Vehicle care 240
Cup holder 243
Engine cleaning 242
Gear selector lever 243
Hard plastic trim items 244
Headlamps 242
Instrument cluster 243
Leather upholstery 244
Light alloy wheels 243
MB Tex upholstery 244
Ornamental moldings 242
Paintwork 241
Plastic and rubber parts 244
Power washer 241
Seat belts 244
Steering wheel 243
Tail lamps 242
Tar stains 241
Turn signals 242
Vehicle washing 242
Window cleaning 243
Wiper blades 243
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 308
Vehicle jack 272
Vehicle lighting
Checking 225
354
Index
Vehicle tool kit 272
Alignment bolt 272
Spare fuses 272
Special fuse puller 272
Towing eye bolt 272
Vehicle jack 272
Wheel bolts 272
Wheel wrench 272
Vehicle washing 242
Ventilated storage compartment 148
Ventilation
Storage compartment 148
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 308,
331
Voice control system* 331
Voice recognition system*
Hands-free microphone 26
W
Warning sounds
Drivers seat belts 62
Parking brake 46
Warranty coverage 307
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 240
Wear pattern (tires) 235
Weights 316
Wheel change
Tightening torque 291
Wheels
Rotating 235
Tires and wheels 233
Window curtain airbags 61
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Defogging 145, 153
Refilling washer fluid 232
Replacing wiper blades 287
Washer fluid 232, 324
Washer system 324
Windshield washer fluid 324
Message in display 270
Mixing ratio 324
Refilling 232
Wiping with 49
Windshield washer system 324
Windshield wipers 48
Fast wiper speed 48
Replacing wiper blades 287
Single wipe 49
Switching on 48
Wiping with windshield washer fluid 49
Winter driving 236
Block heater 237
Snow chains 237
Tires 236
Transmission program mode 136
Winter driving instructions 220
Winter tires 236
Wiper blades
Cleaning 243
Installing 287
Removing 287
Removing insert 287
Replacing 287
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 49
Interval 48
With windshield washer fluid 49
X
Xenon headlamps
Bi-Xenon 327
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We con-
sider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Re-
printing, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2284-31
Press time 12/13/02
GSP/SIP
Printed in Germany
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Error: This Masterpage should never be used!

Navigation menu